&EPA
United States
Environmental Protection
Agency
                         Office of Acid Deposition,
                         Environmental Monitoring and
                         Quality Assurance
                         Washington DC 20460
                                   EPA/600/8-88/083
                                   June 1988
          Research and Development
          National Surface
          Water Survey
          Eastern Lake Survey
          (Phase II—Temporal
          Variability)

          Quality Assurance Plan
*j££fc

-------
                                                    EPA 600/8-88/083
                                                    June 1988
              NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
  EASTERN LAKE SURVEY (PHASE II — TEMPORAL VARIABILITY)
                  QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

                            by

     J. L. Engels, T. E.  Mitchell-Hall,  S.  K.  Drouse',
              M.  D. Best, and D. C. McDonald
Lockheed Engineering and  Management Services Company,  Inc.
                 Las Vegas, Nevada 89119
                 Contract No.  68-03-3249
                     Project Officer

                   Robert D. Schonbrod
          Exposure Assessment Research Division
       Environmental  Monitoring Systems Laboratory
               Las Vegas, Nevada 89193-3478
       ENVIRONMENTAL MONITORING SYSTEMS LABORATORY
              :ICE OF RESEARCH  AND DEVELOPM
              ,  ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AG
               LAS VEGAS,  NEVADA 89193-3478
 OFFICE OF RESEARCH AND DEVELOPMENT^, „.,   ,     f.,.
U.S. ENVIRONMENTAL PROTECTION AGENCY      '  ''"

-------
                                     NOTICE
     The information in this document has been funded wholly or in part by the
United States Environmental Protection Agency under contract number 68-03-3249
to Lockheed Engineering and Management Services Company,  Inc.  It has been
subject to the Agency's peer and administrative review,  and it has been
approved for publication as an EPA document.

     Mention of trade names or commercial products does  not constitute
endorsement or recommendation for use.
                                       ii

-------
                                    ABSTRACT
     The National  Surface Water Survey is part of  the  National  Acid  Precipi-
tation Assessment  Program.   This survey has  been undertaken  to  evaluate  the
current water chemistry of lakes and streams and to  select regionally repre-
sentative surface  waters for a long-term monitoring  program  to  study changes
in aquatic resources.   A synoptic survey of  lakes  in the  eastern  United  States
was included in the first phase of the National Surface Water Survey.  The
Eastern Lake Survey-Phase II involves an evaluation  of within-lake chemical
variability for a  subset of lakes sampled during Phase I.  This manual delin-
eates the quality  assurance plan for the Eastern Lake  Survey-Phase II.

     To ensure that procedures are performed consistently and that the quality
of the data generated  can be determined, the Quality Assurance  Project Plan for
the Eastern Lake Survey-Phase II specifies the following  measures:

     °  Provide detailed, written sampling methodology.

     •  Train all  personnel participating in field activities.

     e  Conduct site visits to each field base and to  the processing laboratory
        during the sampling period to ensure that  all  methods are performed
        properly.

     •  Perform extensive evaluation of analytical laboratories before their
        selection  and  throughout their participation.

     •  Assess variability introduced at each level  of activity in field and
        analytical laboratories by processing audit  samples  (synthetic samples
        and natural lake samples), duplicates, and blanks as well as routine
        samples.

     •  Provide detailed, written analytical methodology.

     •  Use internal quality control procedures at the processing and analyt-
        ical laboratories to detect potential  contamination  and to verify
        established detection limits.

     •  Enforce the requirements for maximum allowable sample holding times.

     •  Use protocols  in the field and in the processing  and analytical
        laboratories to confirm that the reported  data are correct.

-------
     °  Enter data manually into the data  base twice  and  scan  for  outlying
        values to eliminate the effects  of transcription  errors.

     c  Verify data by means of range checks,  internal  consistency checks,
        quality assurance evaluations.
and
     •  Validate verified data by analysis  of  the reasonableness  of  data;  base
        the analysis on the values expected for  the  particular  region  or
        subregion involved.

     A final report providing results and discussion of  quality control and
quality assurance issues will be prepared following  completion  of survey
activities.

     This report was submitted in partia. fulfillment of Contract No.  68-03-3249
by Lockheed Engineering and Management Services  Company, Inc.,  under the  spon-
sorship of the U.S. Environmental Protection Agency.  This  report covers  a
period from February, 1986, to June,  1987,  and work  was  completed as of October,
1987.
                                       IV

-------
                                    CONTENTS
Section                                                         Page    Revision

Abstract	      iii       2
Figures	     viii       2
Tables	       ix       2
Abbreviations	       xi
Acknowledgment 	     xiii       2

1.0  Introduction	    1 of 4     2

2.0  Project Description	    1 of 4     2

     2.1  Objectives	    1 of 4     2
     2.2  Subsurvey*	    1 of 4     2
     2.3  Purpose of the Quality Assurance Plan	    3 of 4     2

3.0  Project Organization	    1 of 3     2

4.0  Quality Assurance Objectives	    1 of 5     2

     4.1  Detectability, Precision,  and Accuracy 	    1 of 5     2
     4.2  Completeness	    5 of 5     2
     4.3  Representativeness	    5 of 5     2
     4.4  Comparability	    5 of 5     2

5.0  Sampling Strategy	    1 of 6     2

     5.1  Lake Selection	    1 of 6     2
     5.2  Sampling Design	    3 of 6     2

6.0  Field Operations	    1 of 18    2

     6.1  Activities of the Sampling Crews	    1 of 18    2
     6.2  Processing Laboratory Operations 	    8 of 18    2
     6.3  Training	18 of 18    2

7.0  Field Measurement Quality Control Checks	    1 of 7     2

     7.1  Lake Site Measurements	    1 of 7     2
     7.2  Processing Laboratory Measurements 	    2 of 7     2

8.0  Analytical  Procedures	    1 of 2     2

-------
                              CONTENTS  (Continued)





Section                                                         Page     Revision
9.0









10.0



11.0




12.0




13.0


14.0




15.0

Analytical Laboratory Internal Quality Control 	
9.1 Sample Receipt 	
9.2 Sample Analysis 	
9.3 Analytical Laboratory Documentation for Quality
Control 	
9.4 Internal Quality Control Within Each Method. . . .
9.5 Overall Internal Quality Control 	
9.6 Instrumental Detection Limits 	
9.7 Data Reporting 	
9.8 Daily Evaluation of Quality Control Data 	
Performance and System Audits 	
10.1 Performance Audit Samples 	
10.2 Quality Assurance System Audits (On-Site
Evaluations) 	
Acceptance Criteria 	
11.1 Acceptance Criteria for Audit Samples 	
11.2 Acceptance Criteria for Duplicate Measurements . .
11.3 Acceptance Criteria for Blank Samples 	
11.4 Corrective Action 	
Data Management System 	
12.1 Data Set 1 - The Raw Data Set 	
12.2 Data Set 2 - The Verified Data Set 	
12.3 Data Set 3 - The Validated Data Set 	
12.4 Data Set 4 - The Enhanced Data Set 	
Data Evaluation and Verification 	
13.1 Field Data Review 	
13.2 Analytical Data Review 	
Data Validation 	
14.1 Overview 	
14.2 Detection of Outliers 	
14.3 Detection of Systematic Error 	
14.4 Treatment of Outliers and Systematic Differences .
Preparation of An Enhanced Data Set 	
15.1 Substi tuuon of Values 	
1 of 16
1 of 16
1 of 16

1 of 16
3 of 16
10 of 16
12 of 16
12 of 16
14 of 16
1 of 6
1 of 6

5 of 6
1 of 3
1 of 3
2 of 3
3 of 3
3 of 3
1 of 8
1 of 8
7 of 8
8 of 8
8 of 8
1 of 8
1 of 8
3 of 8
1 of 8
1 of 8
1 of 8
6 of 8
7 of 8
1 of 3
1 of 3
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

-------
I
I
                                      CONTENTS (Continued)

•       Section                                                         Page   Revision
             15.2 Averaging of Field Duplicate Pairs	   1 of 3      2
             115.3 Treatment of Negative Values	   1 of 3      2
             15.4 The Enhanced Data Set	   3 of 3      2
•       16.0 References	   1 of 4      2
        Appendixes
I             A.   Field and Processing Laboratory Data Forms
                    anrl I ahpl <;
 I
 I
 I
       and Labels	   1 of 13
B.   Analytical  Laboratory and Quality Assurance
       Data Forms	   1 of 28
C.   Field Operations and Processing Laboratory
       On-Site Evaluation Questionnaire 	   1 of 18
             D.   Analytical Laboratory On-Site Evaluation
 I                  Questionnaire	   1 of 53
             E.   Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II Preaward Audit
                    Sample Sw^i ing Sh^t	   1 of  3
              F.    Eastern  Lake  Survey  -  Phase  II
 _                  Verification  Report	    1  of 34

 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 •                                            vi i
 I

-------
FIGURES
Number
1-1

3-1

4-1

5-1

5-2

6-1

6-2

6-3
12-1
13-1

14-1

15-1


Structure and timetable of the National Surface
Water Survey 	
Operational Management Diagram for the Eastern Lake
Survey - Phase II 	
Flow of quality assurance and quality control samples,
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	
Flowchart of the lake selection process for the Eastern
Lake Survey - Phase II seasonal surveys 	
Alkalinity map classes in the Eastern Lake Survey -
Phase II study area 	
Flowchart of sampling crew activities for the
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	
Flowchart of processing laboratory activities for the
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II field data flow scheme . . .
Data management for the Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II. . .
Flowchart of the data verification process, Eastern
Lake Survey - Phase II 	
Flowchart of the data validation process, Eastern Lake
Survey - Phase II 	
Flowchart of the development of the enhanced data set,
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	
Page

2 of 4

2 of 3

4 of 5

2 of 6

4 of 6

2 of 18

9 of 18
17 of 18
2 of 8

2 of 8

3 of 8

2 of 3
   vi i i

-------
1
1
1
1







1
•

1
















1
•

1
•



I
•
1
1


TABLES
Number

1-1 Sections in This Report and in the Analytical Methods
Manual that Address Quality Assurance Subjects 	

4-1 Data Quality Objectives for Detectability, Precision,
and Accuracy 	

5-1 Variables used in Cluster Analyses for ELS-II
Lake Selection . . 	 ....
6-1 Data Forms and Labels used in the Field and in the
Processing Laboratory during the Eastern Lake
Survey - Phase II 	

6-2 Sample Codes used for the Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II . .
6-3 Aliquots, Containers, Preservatives, and Corresponding
Parameters for the Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	
6-4 Samples for Special Studies Conducted During the Eastern
Lake Survey - Phase II 	

8-1 Measurements Made by the Analytical Laboratories for the
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II 	

9-1 Maximum Allowable Sample Holding Times for the
Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II . . 	

9-2 Maximum Control Limits for Quality Control Check Samples . .
9-3 Summary of Internal Quality Control Checks 	

9-4 Data Forms Used by the Analytical Laboratory 	

9-5 Factors to Convert mg/L to ueq/L 	
9-6 Chemical Reanalysis Criteria 	

9-7 Factors for Determining the Conductance of Ions 	
9-8 Decimal Place Reporting Requirements 	

ix




Page


4 of 4


2 of 5


3 of 6


4 of 18

11 of 18

12 of 18

13 of 18


1 of 2


2 of 16

4 of 16
5 of 16

8 of 16

11 of 16
11 of 16

13 of 16
15 of 16




-------
                                    CONTENTS
Section                                                         Page   Revision
Abstract 	
Figures 	
Tables 	
Abbreviations 	
Acknowledgment 	
1.0 Introduction 	
2.0 Project Description 	
2.1 Objectives 	 ' .' .- 	
2.2 Subsurveys 	
2.3 Purpose of the Quality Assurance Plan. . . .
3.0 Project Organization 	
4.0 Quality Assurance Objectives 	
4.1 Detectability, Precision, and Accuracy . . .
4.2 Completeness 	
4.3 Representativeness 	
4.4 Comparability 	
5.0 Sampling Strategy 	
5.1 Lake Selection 	
5.2 Sampling Design 	
6.0 Field Operations 	
6.1 Activities of the Sampling Crews 	
6.2 Processing Laboratory Operations 	
6.3 Training 	
7.0 Field Measurement Quality Control Checks 	
7.1 Lake Site Measurements 	
7.2 Processing Laboratory Measurements 	
8.0 Analytical Procedures 	
... iii
... v i i i
... IX
... xi
... xi ii
1 of 4
1 of 4
... 1 of 4
... 1 of 4
3 of 4
1 of 3
1 of 5
... 1 of 5
... 5 of 5
... 5 of 5
5 of 5
... 1 of 6
... 1 of 6
3 of 6
1 of 18
... 1 of 18
... 8 of 18
18 of 18
1 of 7
. . . 1 of 7
2 of 7
. . . 1 of 2
2
2
2

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

-------
                                TABLES  (Continued)

 Number                                                                   Page
 9-9       National  Surface Water  Survey  Laboratory  and  Field
             Data Qualifiers (Tags)	   16  of 16
10-1       Theoretical  Composition of Field  and  Laboratory Synthetic
             Audit Samples for the Eastern Lake  Survey - Phase  II  ...    2  of 6
10-2       Audit Sample Schedule for the  Eastern Lake Survey -
             Phase II	    4  of 6
12-1       Data Qualifiers (Flags) for  the Raw Data  Set	    3  of 8
13-1       Exception-Identification  and Data Review  Programs	    4  of 8
14-1       Physical  Variables  Subject to  Validation  	    2  of 8
14-2       Pairs of  Variables  Used to Check  for  Random
             and Systematic Errors	    4  of 8
14-3       Related Groups  of Variables  Used  in
             Multivariate  Analyses	    6  of 8
15-1       Data Qualifiers (Flags) for  Validated Data Set	    2  of 3

-------
                                 ABBREVIATIONS3
AAS
ANC
APHA
AQUARIUS III

ASTM
BNC
CD
CE
CI
CRDL
D
DBMS
DIG
DL
DO
DOC
DQO
ELS-I
ELS-II
EMSL-LV

EPA
ERL-C
FIA
HPLC
IBD
ICP
ID
IDL
IFB
IR
LDR
LMD
Lockheed-EMSCO
MIBK
NAPAP
NBS
NCC
NLS
atomic absorption spectroscopy
acid-neutralizing capacity
American Public Health Association
Automated Quality Assurance Review,  Interactive  Users
  System
American Society for Testing and Materials
base-neutralizing capacity
conductance difference
column efficiency
confidence interval
contract-required detection limit
difference
data base management system
dissolved inorganic  carbon
detection limit
dissolved oxygen
dissolved organic carbon
data quality objective
Eastern Lake Survey  - Phase I
Eastern Lake Survey  - Phase II
Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory-Las  Vegas
  (Nevada)
Environmental Protection Agency
Environmental Research Laboratory-Corvallis (Oregon)
flow injection analysis (or analyzer)
high-performance liquid chromotography
ion balance difference
inductively coupled  plasma atomic emission  spectroscopy
identification
instrumental detection limit
Invitation for Bid
infrared
linear dynamic range
local master data base
Lockheed Engineering and Management Services Company,  Inc
methyl isobutyl ketone
National Acid Precipitation Assessment Program
National Bureau of Standards
National Computer Center
National Lake Survey
dThis list does not include units of measurement or chemical  symbols.

                                       xi

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                           ABBREVIATIONS (Continued)
NSS    —  National Stream Survey
NSWS   —  National Surface Water Survey
NTU    --  nephelometric turbidity units
p95    --  95th percent!le
PCA    —  principal  component analysis
PCD    —  platinum-cobalt units
PCV    --  pyrocatechol violet
PE     —  performance evaluation
QA     --  quality assurance
QC     --  quality control
QCCS   —  quality control check sample
RSD    —  relative standard deviation
RTP    --  Research Triangle Park (North Carolina)
RW     —  simulated rainwater audit sample
SAS    --  Statistical Analysis System
SMO    —  Sample Management Office
SOP    —  standard operating procedure
WLS-I  —  Western Lake Survey - Phase I
                                      xi

-------
                                 ACKNOWLEDGMENT

    Contributions essential  to the completion  of this  quality  assurance  document
were provided by the following:   Bill  Bardswick (Ontario  Air Resources Branch),
Jacqueline Lockard (Illinois State Water Survey, now of Hazardous  Waste  Research
and Information Center),  Kenneth Steele (University of Arkansas),  Penelope
Kellar (Kilkelly Environmental Associates),  Deb Chaloud,  Donna Sutton, Annalisa
Hall,  David Peck, Henry Kerfoot, Marianne Faber, Kit Howe,  John Nicholson,  and
Lynn Stanley (Lockheed Engineering and Management Services  Company,  Inc.),
Susan Christie, Deborah Coffey,  and Robert Cusimano (Northrop  Services,  Inc.),
and the Computer Sciences Corporation  word processing  staff at EMSL-LV.

    Their assistance is greatly  appreciated.
                                      xm

-------
                                                                Section 1.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 4
                               1.0  INTRODUCTION
     Published evidence from site-specific studies is consistent with the
hypothesis that certain surface waters within the United States have decreased
in pH, acid-neutralizing capacity (ANC), or both over time; acidic deposition
possibly contributes to such decreases.  Attempts have been made to extrapolate
these local studies to a regional or national scale to estimate quantitatively
the risk to aquatic resources from acidic deposition.  These endeavors have
achieved limited success because of problems associated with (1) the compar-
ability of the sampling and analytical methodologies used, (2) the possibility
of biased or nonrepresentative sampling sites, and (3) a small and incomplete
data base.  (Linthurst et al., 1986).

     To overcome these deficiencies, the U.^  Environmental Protection Agency
(EPA) implemented the Aquatic Effects Research Program (AERP) within its Office
of Research and Development.  The AERP is also a major component of the National
Acid Precipitation Assessment Program (NAPAP) Task Group 6 (Aquatic Effects), a
cooperative effort of nine federal agencies.  One segment of AERP activities is
the National Surface Water Survey (NSWS).  NSWS is designed to evaluate the
present water chemistry of lakes and streams in regions of the United States
potentially susceptible to acidic deposition and to select regionally represen-
tative surface waters for long-term study.

     Figure 1-1 shows how NSWS activities relate to each other.  The first NSWS
lake study was the Eastern Lake Survey - Phase I (ELS-I), a synoptic survey of
selected lakes in the Northeastern, Upper Midwestern, and Southeastern
United States (Linthurst et al., 1986).  ELS-I and the corresponding Western
Lake Survey - Phase I (WLS-I) provided a chemical characterization of lakes
based on a single sample collected from each lake during fall overturn.  The
National Stream Survey (NSS) provided a chemical characterization of streams
from samples collected during spring overturn.  Phase II of the Eastern Lake
Survey (ELS-II) evaluates within-lake temporal and spatial variability of
physical and chemical characteristics for a subset of lakes sampled during
ELS-I.  The information obtained from Phase II sampling will be important in
planning the Temporally Integrated Monitoring of Ecosystems (TIME) project, a
long-term study designed to quantify changes in surface-water chemistry that
result from changes in the level of acidic deposition.

     This quality assurance (QA) plan is the final version of the working
drafts and supplementary documentation that have been used during ELS-II
operations to define QA activities.  The QA policy of the EPA requires every
monitoring and measurement project to have a written and approved QA project
plan (Costle, 1979a and 1979b).   This requirement applies to all environmental
monitoring and measurement efforts authorized or supported by EPA through
regulations, grants, contracts,  or other formal means.  The QA plan should
specify the policies, organization, objectives, functional activities, QA acti-
vities, and quality control (QC) activities designed to achieve the data quality

-------
                                                              Section 1.0
                                                              Revision 2
                                                              Date:  11/87
                                                              Page 2 of 4
                          National  Surface  Water  Survey
                                      (NSWS)
   National  Lake Survey (NLS)
    Phase I-Synoptic Survey

      Eastern Lake (1934)
      Western Lake (1985)
Phase II - Temporal  Variability Survey

         Eastern Lake (1986)

         Snowpack Pilot
         Spring Variability Pilot
         Spring Seasonal
         Summer Seasonal
         Fall Seasonal
National Stream Survey (NSS)
   Phase I-Synoptic Survey

  Pilot Survey (1985)
  Synoptic Survey (1986)
  Southeast Screening (1986!
  Episodes Pilot (1986)
  Figure 1-1.  Structure and timetable of the National  Surface Water  Survey.

-------
                                                                Section  1.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  3  of 4


goals of the project.   All  project personnel  should  be  familiar  with  the
policies and objectives outlined in the QA  plan.

     EPA guidance states that the 16 items  shown  in  Table  1-1  should  be
addressed in the QA project plan (U.S.  EPA, 1980).   Some of  these  items  are
presented in the methods manuals (Kerfoot et al.,  in final preparation;
Hillman et al.,  1986)  for this project.   Method-specific discussions  are not
repeated in this document.

-------
                                                               Section 1.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 4 of 4
       TABLE 1-1.   SECTIONS IN  THIS REPORT  AND  IN  THE  ANALYTICAL METHODS
                MANUAL THAT ADDRESS QUALITY ASSURANCE  SUBJECTS3

Subject
Title Page
Table of Contents
Project Description
Project Organization
and Responsibility
Quality Assurance Objectives
Sampling Procedures
Sample Custody
Calibration Procedures
Analytical Procedures
Data Analysis, Validation,
and Reporting
Internal Quality Control Checks
Performance and System Audits
Preventive Maintenance
Assessment of Precision, Accuracy,
and Completeness
Corrective Actions
Quality Assurance Reports to
Management
This Report

T of C
2
3
4
6
6
6
8
6. 9, 12,
13, 14
7,9
10
6
4, 11
9, 11
9, 10
Analytical
Methods Manual




1
2
2, 3
2
4-13
3
3

2, 3

3

aThese 16 QA subjects must be addressed in every EPA QA Project Plan
 (U.S. EPA,  1980).

-------
                                                                Section  2.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 4
                            2.0  PROJECT DESCRIPTION
     In ELS-II, a subset of Northeastern lakes sampled in Region 1  of  ELS-I
is resampled to assess the within-lake temporal  and spatial  variability of
physical and chemical characteristics.  ELS-II focuses on lakes that are
considered most susceptible to acid deposition,  those with an acid-neutralizing
capacity (ANC) of less than 400 ueq/L.

2.1  OBJECTIVES

       Primary objectives to be addressed in ELS-II are:

     °  Assess the temporal and spatial  variability in the fall index  sample.
        (The fall index sample is the sample that was collected from each
        lake during ELS-I.  The fall index site  is the site  in the  lake from
        which the fall index sample was  collected, normally  the deepest part of
        the lake and normally the center of the  lake.)

     °  Estimate the number of low-ANC lakes (potentially susceptible  to
        acidic deposition) not acidic in the fall that are acidic in other
        seasons, emphasizing spring episodes.

     °  Establish a baseline for seasonal patterns in lake water chemical
        characteristics.

     Other objectives include:

     •  Relate the fall index sample to  seasonal  and annual  variability in
        water chemistry patterns.

     c  Relate the lake water chemical characteristics with  major watershed,
        hydrologic, bathymetric, and autochthonous variables (in cooperation
        with other EPA and NAPAP projects).

2.2  SUBSURYEYS

     For ELS-II, lake chemistry is measured at least once during each  of three
consecutive seasons (spring, summer, and fall seasonal surveys).  Additional
sampling is conducted during the spring  snowmelt  period to permit an evaluation
of the severity of episodes, or acidic releases,  into the lakes (spring variability
pilot study).   The snowpack of some of the associated watersheds also  is sampled
to determine the relationship between snowpack conditions and acidic episodes
in the lakes (snowpack pilot study).  In all, then, five  subsurveys are contained
in ELS-II:   (1) spring variability, (2)  snowpack, (3) spring seasonal, (4)
summer seasonal, and (5) fall seasonal.   This QA  plan pertains to all  the
ELS-II  subsurveys except the snowpack survey, which has its  own QA  plan (DeWalle,
1986).

-------
                                                                Section  2.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 2  of 4
2.2.1  Spring Variability Pilot
     The spring variability pilot study is  designed  to  provide  experience  in
winter sampling techniques and to obtain data  describing  the  spatial  and
temporal variability of lake chemistry  during  snowmelt.   Because  of the
intensive sampling required and the difficult  sampling  conditions, only a  few
lakes are included in this survey.   For the same  reasons,  and because the  goals
are specific and not directly related to the objectives of the  other  ELS-II
surveys, lake selection was strongly based  on  logistical  considerations and the
desire to evaluate a range of lake characteristics ana  was not  random.

     The spring variability study includes  four experiments:  (1) comparing
the data obtained from two different types  of  in  situ monitoring  devices,
(2) collecting samples and taking measurements from  sites on  transects and from
random sites to determine spatial variability  In  the littoral zone,  (3) comparing
two sampling protocols for lakes that are thermally  stratified, and  (4) evaluating
whether assistance from a diaphragm pump improves the efficiency  of  sample
collection with a Van Dorn unit.

     All the chemical variables that were measured during ELS-I are measured
during the spring variability study. At each  lake,  samples are collected  from
a site by the inlet, a site by the outlet,  the fall  index site  from  immediately
below the ice and from mid-hypolimnion, the littoral  station  with the lowest
pH, and the pelagic station with the lowest pH.

2.2.2  Seasonal Surveys

     The three seasonal surveys are conducted  to  identify annual  and  seasonal
variations and patterns in lake water chemical characteristics.   All  the
seasonal samples undergo the same analyses  as  samples from ELS-I, plus analysis
for pyrocatechol violet (PCV)-reactive  aluminum.   For each individual seasonal
survey, additional goals and concerns may apply and  additional  analyses may be
required; these survey-specific goals and analyses are  described  in  the
following paragraphs.  The samples are  collected  from the fall  index  site.

2.2.2.1  Spring Seasonal Survey—
     For the spring seasonal survey, samples are  collected immediately following
ice-out to provide an index of the lake chemical  characteristics  during the
spring overturn period before the onset of  summer stratification.

2.2.2.2  Summer Seasonal Survey—
     The summer seasonal survey takes place during the  period expected to  be
of greatest spatial and temporal variability and  of  highest pH  in the lakes.
In addition to the standard set of analyses, dissolved  oxygen is  measured  in
situ; total nitrogen and chlorophyll a^ are  determined in  the laboratory;  a
second total phosphorus determination is made; tows  are taken for zooplankton
counts; and special sample portions are collected from  the hypolimnion to  deter-
mine if low levels of dissolved oxygen  affect  the valencies and compounds  of

-------
                                                                Section  2.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  3  of 4


metals that are present (anoxics study).   A laboratory  bias  study  is  performed
in conjunction with the summer survey;  the two contract analytical  laboratories
participating in the survey analyze splits of the same  sample  so that any
inter!aboratory bias can be identified.

2.2.2.3  Fall Seasonal  Survey-
     Besides its role as a component seasonal  survey, the  fall  survey serves
as a means to assess the variability, or  sampling error,  associated with the
fall index sample taken during ELS-I.  The degree of  sampling  error will  indicate
the representativeness  of the single ELS-I sample as  a  measure  of  conditions  in
the lake during the fall overturn period.

2.3  PURPOSE OF THE QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

     The purpose of the QA project plan for ELS-II is to  specify measures to
ensure that the procedures are performed  consistently and  that the data  collected
are of known and documented quality.  These measures  are  the following:

     °  Provide detailed, written sampling methodology  (see  the ELS-II
        field operations report [Merritt  and Sheppe,  in preparation], which
        summarizes the  protocols in the unpublished field  operations  manuals:
        Bonoff et al.,  1985; Groeger et al., 1985; Drewes  et al.,  1986;  and
        Todechiney et al., 1986).

     •  Train all personnel participating  in field and  sample  processing
        activities.

     •  Conduct site visits to each field  base and to the  processing
        laboratory to ensure that all methods are performed  properly.

     •  Perform extensive evaluation of the performance of analytical
        laboratories before their selection and throughout their participation.

     °  Assess the amount of overall variability introduced  in  the field, the
        processing laboratory, and the  analytical laboratories  by  processing
        audit samples (synthetic and natural lake samples),  duplicates,  and
        blanks as well  as routine samples.  (The processing  laboratory  is the
        laboratory in Las Vegas, Nevada,  that performs  preliminary analyses;  an
        analytical laboratory is an off-site contract laboratory that performs
        the more detailed chemical  analyses.)

     •  Provide detailed, written analytical methodology  (see  the  analytical
        methods manuals, Kerfoot et al.,  in final preparation,  and Hillman et al.,
        1986).

     •  Use internal QC procedures at the  analytical  laboratory to detect poten-
        tial  contamination and to verify  the established detection limits.

     e  Enforce the requirements for maximum allowable  sample  holding times.

-------
                                                                Section 2.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 4


     •  Use protocols in the field,  in  the  processing  laboratory,  and in the
        analytical  laboratory to confirm that  the  reported data  are correct.

     «  Enter data  manually into the data base twice,  and scan for outlying
        values to eliminate effects  of  transcription errors.   (For the summer
        and fall  surveys,  only data  from the field forms are  entered twice;
        data from the analytical  laboratories  are  entered directly onto floppy
        disks at  the laboratory and  are uploaded electronically  into the data
        base, so  double entry is unnecessary.)

     •  Verify the  raw data set by means of range  checks, internal consistency
        checks, and other  QA evaluations.

     •  Validate  the verified data set  by analyzing the  scientific reasonable-
        ness of the data,  based on the  values  expected for the particular
        region or subregion involved.

     Following completion  of ELS-II  activities,  a  final  report will be prepared
that will  present and discuss QA and QC analyses and studies.

-------
                                                                Section 3.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 3
                           3.0  PROJECT ORGANIZATION
     Figure 3-1 illustrates the ELS-II operational  management structure.   The
program director has overall responsibility for the program.   The program
managers and technical director have the following  responsibilities:

     Program Managers.  The program managers serve  as liaisons between  the
     headquarters staff, the laboratory directors,  and NAPAP  personnel.
     Questions regarding general management and resources should be forwarded
     to the program managers through the technical  director.

     Technical Director.  The technical director sees that the program  objectives
     are satisfied, that the components of the program are well-integrated,  and
     that the deadlines are met.  The technical director coordinates  and  inte-
     grates the activities of the Environmental Research Laboratory at  Corvallis,
     Oregon (ERL-C), the Environmental Monitoring Systems Laboratory  at Las
     Vegas, Nevada (EMSL-LV), and the contractors.   The technical director also
     coordinates peer reviews and resolves issues of responsibility.  The
     office of the technical director is the focal  point for  general  public
     inquiry and distribution of report information.   The technical director
     represents the program managers as necessary and keeps the program managers
     informed of EPA laboratory activities, progress, and performance.

     The following describes the roles of the laboratories at Corvallis and
Las Vegas.

     ERL-C  is a focal point for ELS-II.  Its responsibilities include:

     •  Developing the sampling design.

     •  Selecting the sampling sites.

     •  Preparing the sampling protocols (jointly with EMSL-LV).

     •  Collecting supplemental historical and other available data on  each
        sampling site (aquatic and terrestrial components).

     •  Analyzing the data (jointly with EMSL-LV).

     •  Interpreting and mapping the data.

     •  Preparing reports (progress and final  reports,  with contributions from
        the other participants relative to their responsibilities).

     °  Assessing and resolving all science-related issues other than QA/QC
        (jointly with other participants as necessary).

-------
                                                             Section 3.0
                                                             Revision 2
                                                             Date:  11/87
                                                             Page 2 of 3
                              Program Director
                              Program Managers
                 Peer Reviewers	>|
       ERL-C

Sampling Design
Site Selection
Site Description
Data Validation
Data Interpretation
Reporting Routine
  Data
Technical  Director
     EMSL-LV

Field Operations
  and Logistics
Special Processing
  Operations
Analytical Methods
Data Verification
QA and QC Operations
  and Reporting
  (including QA
  Manager)
Data Management
  (with data base
   manager)
              Figure 3-1.  Operational  Management Diagram for the
                        Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II.

-------
I
I
I
                                                                       Section 3.0
                                                                       Revision 2
                                                                       Date:   11/87
                                                                       Page 3 of 3
             •  Coordinating activities of survey participants.
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
             «  Independently assessing the variability (accuracy  and precision  of
I              field measurements and laboratory  data).
             •  Assessing and resolving all problems  pertaining  to QA and  QC,  logistics,
•              and analytical  services.
             •  Coordinating the development and maintenance  of  a  data management
I                system,  including (1)  entry of all  field,  laboratory, and  support data
                into the data base and simultaneous assessment of  data quality and  (2)
                preparation of computer-generated  summary  tables,  statistics,  and
                graphics for reports.   Systems Applications,  Inc.  (SAI), the  firm
                (contracted to be the data base manager  for ELS-II, performs a sub-
                stantial part of these activities.
            EMSL-LV has particular expertise in matters relating to quality assurance
        (QA) and quality control (QC), logistics, analytical services, and sampling
        protocols.  The responsibilities of this laboratory for ELS-II include:
            «  Developing the QA and QC procedures for all components of the program.
            o  Preparing the sampling protocols (jointly with ERL-C).
            •  Preparing methods manuals for the processing and analytical
               laboratories.
            «  Preparing field training and operations manuals.
            •  Preparing and implementing the QA project plan.
            •  Coordinating the logistical support and equipment needs for all  field
               operations.
            «  Training the sampling personnel.
            •  Distributing all samples to the analytical laboratories.
            •  Developing and implementing the QA and QC procedures for verification
               of field measurements and processing and analytical laboratory data.

-------
                                                               Section 4.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 1 of 5


                       4.0  QUALITY ASSURANCE  OBJECTIVES

4.1  DETECTABILITY,  PRECISION,  AND ACCURACY

     The QA objectives for detectability,  precision,  and  accuracy of the
parameters being measured are outlined  in  Table  4-1.   Precision and accuracy
are determined by analyzing data from QA and QC  samples.  These QA and QC
samples are incorporated into the overall  sample flow as  indicated in Figure 4-1
External QA samples  include:

     e  Field blank.   A field blank is  a deionized  water  sample that meets the
        specifications for the American Society  for the Testing of Materials
        (ASTM) Type  1 reagent water (ASTM, 1984).   The field  blank is carried
        to the lake,  passed through the Van Dorn sampler, and processed as
        though it were a routine sample.   One  field blank is  collected at two
        field sites  on each operating day. Only one field  blank is analyzed
        per sample batch (see Section 6.2.2.1);  the other blank (called the
        secondary blank) is collected as a precaution in  case the first field
        blank is contaminated,  lost,  or destroyed.   Field blank data are used
        to estimate  the system detection limit,  the system  decision limit, and
        the quantitation limit for each type of  analysis.   For data interpreta-
        tion, a data point above the system detection limit is the data point
        above which  a response is considered positive.  The system decision
        limit represents the lowest instrument signal  that  can be distinguished
        from background at a = 0.05.  The  quantitation limit  is based on the
        variability  of blank sample measurements and is used  in evaluating the
        precision of routine sample measurements (see Best  et a!., 1987).

     °  Field duplicate.  A field duplicate is a second sample collected
        immediately  after the routine sample is  collected.   Field duplicate
        data are used to estimate the overall  within-batch  precision for sample
        collection,  processing, and analysis.  One  field  duplicate is collected
        by each of two sampling crews each operating day.   Only one field
        duplicate sample is analyzed each  operating day;  the  other one  (called
        the secondary duplicate) is collected  as a  precaution in case anything
        happens to the first field duplicate.

     °  Audit sample.  An audit sample  is  a sample  with known characteristics
        that TS used in determining the precision and the accuracy of the
        measurement  system.  Two types  of  audit  samples serve as QA checks for
        ELS-II:  field audit and laboratory audit samples.   Field audit samples
        (natural and synthetic) are used in checking the  overall system  (field
        and laboratory) performance; laboratory  audit samples (natural  and
        synthetic) are used in checking the performance of  the analytical
        laboratory.   Audit samples are  discussed in greater detail in Section
        10.0.

-------
1
1
1
•
1

1







1
•

1


1





1
•i

1

1

1
•V






1
1
1
Section 4.0
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page
TABLE 4-1. DATA QUALITY OBJECTIVES FOR DETECTABILITY,
PRECISION, AND ACCURACY
Detectability Precision
Required Relative Standard
2 Of 5


Accuracy

Expected Detection Deviation (RSD) Maximum Absolute
Parameter8 Units Range" Limit Upper Limit (S)C
Acid-neutralizing
capacity (ANC) ueq/L -30 - +400 1 10 10
Aluminum, non-
exchangeable
PCV-reactive mg/L 0.0 - 0.3e 0.01 10 10
Aluminum, total mg/L 0.008 - 0.75 0.005 10 (Al>0.01 mg/L)f 10
20 (AK0.01 mg/L)f 20
Aluminum, total mg/L 0.0 - 0.3 0.005 10 (Al>0.01 mg/L)f 10
extractable 20 (Al<0.01 mg/L)f 20
Aluminum, total
PCV-reactive mg/L 0.0 - 0.3e 0.01 10 10
Ammonium mg/L 0.03 - 0.5 0.01 5 10
Base-neutralizing
capacity (BNC) ueq/L +7.0 - +150 °" 10 10

Calcium mg/L 0.4 - 9 0.01 5 10
Carbon, dissolved
inorganic (DIC) mg/L 0.3 - 5.0 0.05 10 10
Carbon, dissolved mg/L 0.4 - 12.5 0.1 5 (DOC>5 mg/L)f 10
organic (DOC) 10 (DOC^5 mg/L)f 10
Chloride ng/L 0.3 - 25 0.01 5 10
Chlorophyll t ug/L 0.5 - 50* 0.1 9 9
Conductance uS/cm 11 - 103 n 2 5

•Dissolved ions and metals are determined, except where noted.
bUnless otherwise noted, these are the ranges observed during ELS-1 in the 150 lakes
the ELS-II seasonal surveys; values have been rounded off.
cUn1ess otherwise noted, this is the SRSD at concentrations greater than 10 times the
detection limit.
^Absolute value of blank must be <10 ueq/L.
Bias (1)





(Al>0.01 mg/L)f
IAK0.01 mg/L)f
(Al>"0.01 mg/L)f
(AU0.01 mg/L)f









(DOC>5 mg/L)f
(DOC<5 mg/Lr



(continued)
designated for

required


eAnalysis was not performed during ELS-1; range of expected values was derived from other NSWS
studies when possible.
^Concentration expressed is the mean concentration of the routine/duplicate pairs.
9Not yet available.
"The mean of six nonconsecutive blank measurements must not exceed 0.9 uS/cm.








-------
                                                                                Section 4.0
                                                                                Revision  2
                                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                                Page  3 of 5
                                   TABLE  4-1.    (Continued)
Parameter*
Fluoride, total
dissolved
Iron
Magnesium
Manganese
Nitrate
Nitrogen, total
Oxygen, dissolved
(DO)
pH, processing
laboratory
(closed system)
pH, analytical
laboratory
Phosphorus, total
Potassium
Silica
Sodium
Sulfate
True color
Turbidity
Units
•g/L
ng/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
mg/L
PH
PH
•g/L
mg/L
»g/L
mg/L
mg/L
PCUJ
NTUk

Detectability
Required
Expected Detection
Range'1 Limits
0.01
0.0
0.15
0.0
0.0
0.01
7
4.4
4.4
0.0
0.06
0.0
0.1
1.6
0.0
0.0
- 0.33 0.005
- 0.6 0.01
- 2.75 0.01
- 0.3 0.01
- 1.2 0.005
- 20* 0.004
- 12
- 7.6
- 7.6
- 0.1 0.002
- 1.7 0.01
- 7.0 0.05
- 14 0.01
- 15 0.05
- 200 0
- 5 2
Precision
Relative Standard
Deviation (RSD)
Upper Limit (J)c
5
10
5
10
10
6
5
0.1*
0.1*
10(P>0.01 iig/L)f
20(P_<0.01 mg/L)f
5
5
5
5
5<
10
Accuracy
Maximum Absolute
Bias (X)
10
10
10
10
10
5
5
0.1*
0.1*
10(P>0.01 mg/L)
20(P<0.01 mg/L)
10
10
10
10
—
10
•Dissolved ions  and metals are determined,  except where noted.
''Unless otherwise noted, these are the ranges observed during ELS-J  in  the  150  lakes designated for
 the ELS-II  seasonal surveys; values have been rounded off.
cunless otherwise noted, this is the JRSD at concentrations greater  than  10 times the required
 detection limit.
^Absolute value  of blank must be £10 ueq/L.
'Analysis was  not performed during ELS-I; range of expected values was  derived  from other NSWS
 studies when  possible.
fConcentration expressed is the mean concentration of the routine/duplicate pairs.
9Not yet available.
"The mean of six nonconsecutive blank Measurements oust not exceed 0.9  uS/cm.
^Absolute goal u, applicable units.
JPCU « platinum-cobalt  units.
kNTU • nephelometrU turbidity units.

-------
1
1

II , r-
^
2o
IO vj
t<
.jcn
T— ^"\
- u. u.
Ill ft3
<-
Ul s UJ
<°S
y§55
S'tOct
^ceCc-E
°
lee /












u
4->
C
o
0
>,
±_>
CO
o
3
<
o
«J
UJ
u.


^— »— i
^_ 5^ *O
£ Z 3 ,
_• j CO;
= < re >
0








\
) <
/ J

O
Z
o
u
/5 X"
J a.
Vv.
HYDROLAB



3 3
to 1/1
to
to ,- « 0)
cc 5 to >, ro
0 § t J_> _j
fc < o -^
UJ £ => r— C
^0 ^ * « £
% CO C 0 3 
-------
                                                                Section  4.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  5  of 5


     Internal field QC samples are used primarily by the sampling  crews  and
processing laboratory staff to check the accuracy of the measurement  systems
in the field and the processing laboratory.   Internal  field QC samples
include the following:  Hydrolab quality control  check sample (QCCS)  for
pH and conductance, processing laboratory QCCS for pH, DIC, and turbidity,
trailer duplicate, and trailer (calibration)  blank.   These are described in
greater detail in Sections 6.0 and 7.0.

     Internal analytical laboratory QC samples include the following:
calibration blank, reagent blank, QCCS, detection limit QCCS, and  analytical
laboratory duplicate.  These are described in Section 9.0.

4.2  COMPLETENESS

     Data completeness refers to the amount of valid data obtained from
a measurement system compared to the amount expected to be obtained under
normal operating conditions.  Data completeness is assessed for each  subsurvey
and is a function of sample collection and analytical  systems.  The objective
for completeness of data for the ELS-II verified  data set is 90 percent  or
better for all parameters.  This figure is based  on experience gained during
previous studies.

4.3  REPRESENTATIVENESS

     Representativeness refers to the degree to which the sample data accurately
represent the population of interest.  ELS-II, like ELS-I, is not  intended  to
perfectly characterize a single lake, but to represent the stratum (alkalinity  map
class within the geographic subregion) to which the lake belongs.   Furthermore,
for ELS-II, only lakes with ANC of less than 400  ueq/L are being studied, so
the population does not include all lakes in a particular region or subregion.
However, the purpose of determining the temporal  and spatial variability in the
ELS-II lakes is, in fact, to evaluate the representativeness of the ELS-I fall
index sample.  (See Section 9.5.1 for a comparison of the terms "alkalinity"
and "ANC.")

4.4  COMPARABILITY

     Data comparability is ensured by using a uniform set of procedures for
all sampling crews and laboratories and a uniform set of units for reporting
the data.  The QA procedures described in succeeding sections allow for the
determination of accuracy (bias) for each analytical laboratory so that their
results can be compared.  Because of the use of uniform procedures and  reporting
units, results are comparable from one NSWS survey to another and to any similar
surveys that use the same procedures and units.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 5.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1  of 6
                             5.0  SAMPLING STRATEGY
5.1  LAKE SELECTION

     This section describes the lake selection process for the three seasonal
surveys.  As explained in Section 2.0, the lakes sampled during the spring
variability study were selected based on logistical  considerations.

     Lakes were selected for the three ELS-II seasonal surveys principally  on
the basis of results from the ELS-I synoptic chemical  survey.   The sampling
strategy for ELS-I was based on a stratified random design with equal  alloca-
tion of samples among alkalinity map classes (Linthurst et al., 1986).   To
retain the statistical goal of extrapolating the ELS-II results to the popula-
tion of lakes described in ELS-I and to meet funding and logistical constraints,
approximately 50 lakes were chosen for sampling within each stratum in the
Northeast (NLS Region 1).  In brief, ELS-II lake selection involved four primary
steps (see Figure 5-1):

     Step 1.  Examine data to identify lakes of low interest that are not to be
     sampled for ELS-II.

     Step 2.  Examine relationships among the physical and chemical variables
     that were studied for the ELS-I lakes and identify clusters of lakes that
     have similar characteristics (see Table 5-1).   From this  process,  define
     three groups by ANC (as measured in ELS-I):  ANC less than 25 ueq/L, ANC
     between 25 and 100 ueq/L, and ANC between 100 and 400 peq/L.   Figure 5-2
     is a map of the alkalinity classes in the study area; it  also shows the
     five subregions into which the study area is divided.

     Step 3.  Order the lakes in each group by subregion and site depth to
     increase the likelihood for good spatial coverage of lakes throughout  the
     region.

     Step 4.  Select specific lakes (designated as "regular" lakes) within  each
     alkalinity map class (within a probability sampling frame) to be sampled
     during ELS-II.

     Lakes that have the following characteristics were excluded from considera-
tion for ELS-II:

     •  Lakes with ANC greater than 400 ueq/L.

     •  Large lakes (greater than 2000 ha) (Note:  lakes less  than about 4  ha
        were not sampled in ELS-I and thus are not included in ELS-II).

     •  Shallow lakes (less than 1.5 m in depth).

     •  Lakes highly enriched by nutrients (total phosphorus concentration
        greater than 90 ueq/L, nitrate greater  than  50 ueq/L,  ammonium greater

-------
                                                          Section 5.0
                                                          Revision 2
                                                          Date:  11/87
                                                          Page 2 of 6
                                                    RESERVED
                                                     LAKES
                                                     n»260
7

2. CLUSTER
ANALYSIS

>


1
Figure 5-1.  Flowchart of the  lake  selection process for Eastern Lake
     Survey - Phase II seasonal  surveys  (adapted from unpublished
                           research plan).

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section 5.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 6
           TABLE 5-1.  VARIABLES USED IN CLUSTER ANALYSES FOR ELS-II
                            LAKE SELECTION
           Lake depth                        Dissolved organic carbon
           Watershed area                    ANC
           Lake elevation                    Sodium chloride
           Lake area                         Aluminum
           Lake stratification               Calcium and magnesium

           pH                                Nitrate
           Color                             Ammonium
           Base cations                      Total phosphorus
           Sodium                            Turbidity
           Sulfate                           Secchi disk transparency
           Silica
        than 30 pg/L, turbidity greater than 7 NTU,  or Secchi  disk transparency
        less than 0.5 m).

     °  Lakes modified significantly by anthropogenic disturbances or in-lake
        management practices (e.g., sewage treatment plants,  liming operations).

     After lakes with these characteristics were excluded,  some remaining lakes
were selected as alternates in case a regular lake could not  be sampled.   Some
special interest lakes, which were not selected according to  the probability
frame, were sampled as part of ELS-II; however, these lakes were not included
in population estimates.

5.2  SAMPLING DESIGN

     The sampling design for each component study of ELS-II is discussed  below.
For every component study, one 4-L Cubitainer and four 60-cc  syringes are filled
for each routine sample.

5.2.1  Spring Variability Pilot Study

     Spring snowmelt represents the dominant episodic event affecting the
chemical characteristics of Northeastern lakes and streams.  Depressions  in
lake pH during snowmelt can be highly variable in space and time,  and they
cannot be adequately characterized by a single sample or a  small number of
samples.  Therefore, each lake is sampled at multiple sites on multiple dates.
Because of the sampling intensity, the constraints of manpower, time, and
sample volume, and the design uncertainty, it is not feasible  to characterize
the spring snowmelt episodes for a large number of lakes; therefore, the  spring
variability study involves only six lakes.

-------
                                                                Section 5.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 6
                           ALKALINITY CLASSES
                                U»q/L)
                           < 100
                           100 to 200
                           > 200
                  	 STATE BOUNDARY
                  	 SUBREGION BOUNDARY)
    PENNSYLVANIA
                                                             NEW HAMPSHIRE


                                                         MASSACHUSETTS
       NEW YORK
  RHODE ISLAND


CONNECTICUT
                    NEW JERSEY
Figure 5-2.   Alkalinity map classes in the Eastern  Lake Survey - Phase  II
            study area.  Adapted  from Omernik and  Powers (1983)
                       and Omernik  and Kinney (1935).

-------
                                                                Section  5.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 5 of 6


     On each lake, locations for in situ measurements and sample collection are
situated along transects perpendicular to the lake inlet(s).   This maximizes
the probability of detecting acidic contributions from inflowing tributaries
and from direct watershed runoff.  The in situ measurements are made and samples
are collected at weekly intervals for about 6 weeks.   The first visit to the
lake precedes the initiation of snowmelt.

     At each lake, in situ profiles of the temperature,  conductance, and pH of
the water column are made at the following sites:

     •  Five stations on each of two transects across each lake, including
        sites near tributary inlets, in the littoral  (shallower) zone away from
        inlets, and in the pelagic (deeper) zone.

     °  Two tributaries and one lake outlet.

     °  The fall index site.

     Samples are collected each week for a full set of chemical measurements
from the following sites.

     •  The two stations (one littoral and one pelagic)  with  the lowest
        in situ pH values, from immediately below the ice.

     °  The fall index site; one sample is collected  from immediately beneath
        the ice and one from 60 percent of the maximum depth  (mid-hypolimnion).

     •  The bottom of the tributary reaches immediately above the backwater
        of the lake.

     •  The lake outlet.

     In addition, instrumentation capable of recording data is placed in the
lake's major inlet to monitor changes in water chemistry continuously.

5.2.2  Spring Seasonal  Survey

       For the spring seasonal  survey, the 150 lakes  are sampled one time,
during lake overturn.   A sample is collected from each lake at the same
location (fall index site) and  depth (1.5 m below the water surface),  following
the same sampling procedure used during ELS-I.  This  minimizes the effect of
spatial variability and improves the evaluation of among-season chemical varia-
bility and patterns.  For the seasonal surveys, sampling crews reach the lakes
either by ground and boat access or by helicopter.

5.2.3  Summer Seasonal  Survey

       Samples for the summer seasonal survey are collected at the same  site
in each lake as the ELS-I fall  index sample was collected.  Samples are

-------
                                                                Section  5.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 6


collected routinely from a depth of 1.5 m from the surface.   If the lake is
deeper than 3 m, another sample is collected at either the mid-hypolimnion (if
the lake is stratified) or 1.5 m off the bottom of the lake,  as determined from
temperature profile data.  In addition to the routine, duplicate,  and blank
samples collected in the other seasonal surveys, several  other kinds of  samples
are taken.  A bottle of sample for chlorophyll ^analysis is  filled from the
Van Dorn sampling unit.  For the anoxics study, additional samples are taken
in syringes for iron and manganese determinations, avoiding air contact.
Three vertical tows with a plankton net are made at each  sampling  site to
collect zooplankton samples.  For the laboratory bias study,  a triplicate
sample is collected from near the surface and near the bottom of each lake
from which duplicate samples are collected.

5.2.4  Fall Seasonal Survey

       For the fall seasonal survey, 147 lakes are sampled once, following the
same procedures outlined for the spring seasonal survey.   The fall survey also
includes a variability study, for which 50 of the 147 lakes are sampled  two
additional times to allow the variance component of the fall  index sample to be
determi ned.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 12.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 5 of 8


                            TABLE 12-1.  (Continued)


C9  Percent conductance difference (%CD) is outside criteria because of
    possible analytical error - cation concentration too high (flag suspect
    cation).

FLAGS GENERATED BY DUPLICATE PRECISION EXCEPTION PROGRAM:

DO  External (field) duplicate precision exceeded the maximum expected percent
    relative standard deviation (£RSD), but either the routine or the duplicate
    concentrations were <10 x CRDL.

D2  External (field) duplicate precision exceeded the maximum expected percent
    relative standard deviation URSD), and both the routine and duplicate
    sample concentrations were >1Q x CRDL.

D3  Internal (lab) duplicate precision exceeded the maximum contract-required
    percent relative standard deviation (ZRSD), and both the routine and
    duplicate sample concentrations were _>10 x CRDL.

FLAGS USED WHEN FIELD DATA ARE OUTSIDE CRITERIA:

FO  Percent conductance difference UCD) exceeded criteria when Hydrolab
    conductance value was substituted.

Fl  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicates processing laboratory
    pH problem when Hydrolab pH value is substituted.

F2  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicates unexplained problem
    with field (Hydrolab)  pH or processing laboratory DIG value when Hydrolab
    pH value is substituted for processing laboratory pH.

F3  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicates field problem -
    processing laboratory pH.

F4  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicates field problem -
    processing laboratory PIC.

F5  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicates unexplained problem
    with processing laboratory pH or DIG values when processing laboratory pH
    value is "substituted.

FLAGS GENERATED BY HOLDING TIME EXCEPTION PROGRAM:

HO  The maximum holding time criteria were not met.

                                                                    (continued)

-------
                                                                Section  12.U
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 8


                            TABLE 12-1.   (Continued)


HI  No "Date Analyzed" data were submitted for  reanalysis  data.

FLAG GENERATED BY DETECTION LIMIT EXCEPTION PROGRAM:

LI  Instrumental Detection Limit (IDL) exceeded CRDL  and sample  concentration
    was <10 x IDL.

MISCELLANEOUS FLAG:

MO  Value obtained using a method which  is unacceptable as specified by  the
    Invitation for Bid (IFB)  contract.

FLAGS GENERATED BY AUDIT CHECK PROGRAM:

NO  Audit sample value exceeded upper  control  limit.

Nl  Audit sample value was below control  limit.

FLAGS GENERATED BY HILLMAN/KRAMER PROTOLYTE ANALYSIS  PROGRAM:

PO  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - initial pH  from ANC
    titration.

PI  Protolyte analysis program indicate"  lab problem  - initial pH  from BNC
    titration.

P2  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - unexplained - initial  pH
    from ANC or BNC titration.

P3  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - initial PIC.

P4  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - air-equilibrated  pH or
    PIC.

P5  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - unexplained - initial  pH
    from ANC or BNC titration or initial  PIC.

P6  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - ANC determination.

P7  Protolyte analysis program indicates  lab problem  - BNC determination.
                                                                    (continued)

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
                                                                Section 12.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 7 of 8


                            TABLE 12-1.  (Continued)


FLAGS GENERATED BY QCCS EXCEPTION PROGRAM(S):

Ql  QCCS was above contractual criteria.

Q2  QCCS was below contractual criteria.

Q3  Insufficient number of QCCS were measured.

Q4  No QCCS analysis was performed.

EXCLUSION FLAG:

X...  Values for X flags should not be included in any statistical analysis.

MISSING VALUE CODE

"."  Value never reported.   (Note:  This code appears in numeric fields only.)


12.2  DATA SET 2 - THE VERIFIED DATA SET

     The raw field and laboratory data are transmitted on magnetic tapes from
SAI to the EMSL-LV QA group.   All data are then evaluated and verified, and
appropriate flags (see Table 12-1) are applied to the raw data as described in
Section 13.0.  The data are processed using the "Automated Quality Assurance
Review, Interactive Users System" (AQUARIUS III), computer-assisted QA system
developed by the EMSL-LV QA staff.  Reports generated by AQUARIUS III range in
subject from complex protolyte analysis to simple external and internal blank
checks for QA purposes (see Table 13-1).

     The AQUARIUS III aquatics analysis system generates data changes in the
form of transaction records from exception programs and from manually edited
records copied from a local master data base (LMD).  These transaction records
are used by the EMSL-LV QA group to update the LMD.  Results of verification by
the EMSL-LV QA group consist of a copy of the updated LMD and a history file that
contains the transaction records that were used to update the LMD.  The updated
LMD and the history file are sent to SAI.  There, the history file is applied to
a copy of the official  raw data set and the result is checked against the
updated LMD.  When the two data sets agree, the result is the official verified
data set.

     In addition to the standard QA analyses, AQUARIUS III is used to generate
various printouts supplied  to the QA manager to point out intralaboratory,
inter!aboratory, and interfield bias, as well as discrepancies in blanks,

-------
                                                                Section  12.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 8 of 8


audits, or other QA samples.  The overall  outcome is a verified  data set in
which all questionable values are qualified.  The QA personnel coordinate
with the field bases, the processing laboratory, and the  analytical  labora-
tories to make all appropriate corrections in the data.

12.3  DATA SET 3 - THE VALIDATED DATA SET

     The validation process begins in tandem with the verification process.
When a computerized version of the verified data set is  provided by SAI
through Research Triangle Park (RTP) to the ERL-C staff,  validation can  be
completed.  The validation process increases the overall  integrity of  the
data base by evaluating all data for internal and regional  consistency using
all the QA and QC information available.

     The validation process compares data  for a set of variables against a
much narrower range utilizing knowledge of relationships  in aquatic chemistry
and limnology to identify intrasite sample inconsistencies.  Intersite valida-
tion consists of comparing single site values with adjacent sites within a
region.  Data for groups of sites are compared and mapped to check for con-
sistency.  The validation process is discussed further in Section 14.0.   After
undergoing this review process, the data,  lake by lake,  are transferred  to  the
validated data base.

12.4  DATA SET 4 - THE ENHANCED DATA SET

     Computer calculations of population estimates cannot be performed if values
are missing from the  data set.  An enhanced data set (Data Set 4) is prepared
to resolve such problems by inserting reliable values where ones are missing  in
the validated data set (Data Set 3).  Data Set 4 also is modified from Data Set
3 by averaging field  duplicate values (if  QA precision criteria  are met) and  by
replacing analytical  values determined during validation to be erroneous.
These refinements are described in Section 15.  For other applications,  use of
the verified or validated data sets may be more appropriate.

-------
                                                                Section 13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 8
                     13.0  DATA EVALUATION AND VERIFICATION
     Data review begins with daily calls made to the processing laboratory and
each analytical laboratory (1) to ensure that QA/QC guidelines are being fol-
lowed, (2) to ensure that samples are being handled and analyzed properly, (3)
to obtain current sample data, and (4) to discuss problems that may occur
during analyses.  The primary objective of these calls is to identify and
resolve issues quickly, before they affect data quality or interfere with the
completion of the survey.

     Preliminary sample data are obtained by verbal or computer communication,
by floppy disks sent by overnight courier, or by TELEFAX, depending on the
analytical laboratory.  The preliminary data are evaluated by comparing the QA
sample data against acceptance criteria.

     Responsible parties are notified of problems and all interactions are
recorded in bound notebooks.

     As the processing and analytical laboratory data are received by the
EMSL-LV QA staff, all data are evaluated based on the available QA and QC
information, using the established and organized review process described here.
The objective of the data verification process is to identify and correct,
flag, or eliminate data of unacceptable quality.  Computer programs have been
developed to automate this process as much as possible.  Each batch of data is
evaluated on a sample-by-sample basis, as described in the following sections.
Figure 13-1 is a summary of the verification process.

13.1  FIELD DATA REVIEW

     Each field data form is reviewed to check for the following items:

     1.  Lake ID.  The lake ID recorded on the lake data form is compared to
         the lake ID recorded on the batch form to identify and correct trans-
         cription errors.

     2.  Processing Laboratory (Trailer) Duplicate.  On the batch form, the
         lake ID for the trailer duplicate should match the lake ID for a
         routine sample.

     3.  Hydrolab Calibration Data.   The pH and conductance calibration data on
         the lake data form are compared to data on the Hydrolab calibration
         forms to ensure that initial calibration criteria are met; if the
         criteria are not met, correct data qualifiers are noted.

     4.  Hydrolab pH.  The pH reading at 1.5 m, recorded on the lake data form,
         is compared to the processing laboratory pH reading on the batch form.

-------
                                                      Section  13.0
                                                      Revision  2
                                                      Date:  11/87
                                                      Page 2 of 8
  C>«. »...„ L-.  \
  M AMrM U»  /
    Q"   ^X
Figure 13-1.  Flowchart of the data verification process,
             Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
1
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
                                                                Section 13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 8


     5.   Processing Laboratory (Trailer) pH and DIC.  Batch form measurements
          for field audit samples are evaluated in accordance with the associated
          acceptance criteria.  Routine/duplicate pairs and trailer duplicate
          pairs are evaluated for precision.

     6.   Data Qualifiers.  Comments and data qualifiers are reviewed for
          correct use and consistency.

     Data anomalies are reported to the processing laboratory coordinator for
review, and data reporting errors are reported to SAI to be corrected before
entry  into the raw data set.  All telephone communications are recorded in
bound  notebooks and data corrections are annotated on the appropriate forms.

13.2   ANALYTICAL DATA REVIEW

13.2.1  Preliminary Review of Sample Data Package

     When the sample data packages are received by the EMSL-LV QA staff, they
are reviewed for completeness, internal QC compliance, and appropriate use of
data qualifiers.  The first part of the ELS-II Verification Report (given in
Appendix  F) is used to assure consistency in the review of all data packages.
Any discrepancies related to analytical data are reported to the appropriate
analytical laboratory manager for corrective action.  If discrepancies affect
billing or data entry, then SMO or SAI is notified.  Comments provided in the
cover  letter are also reviewed to determine their impact on data quality and
the need  for any follow-up action by the laboratory.  This data review process
is also important in verifying that the contractual requirements are met for
the purpose of payment.

13.2.2  Review of Quality Assurance and Quality Control  Data

     The spring variability and spring seasonal analytical data are taken from
the data  forms and are entered into the raw data set by SAI as the data packages
are received; the analytical  laboratory data from the summer and fall surveys,
which  are made available to SAI on floppy disks, are uploaded into the raw data
set.   A magnetic tape containing raw data is sent to the EPA IBM 3081 at the
National Computer Center (NCC), Research Triangle Park,  North Carolina.  Each
tape received by the NCC tape library is given a volume  serial number and a BIN
number that indicates the physical  location of the tape.  The tape is loaded
remotely by the EMSL-LV QA staff, and exception programs, listed in Table 13-1,
are generated by AQUARIUS III.

     The remainder of the verification report is completed with the use of
outputs from exception reports (along with the original  data and field note-
books).  The verification report is a worksheet that systematically guides the
auditor through the verification process:   it explains how to flag data, tracks
data resubmissions, tracks reanalysis and confirmation requests, lists the
steps to help explain the QA exceptions, summarizes all  modifications to the
raw data base,  and lists all  flagged sample data.

-------
                                                                Section  13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 4  of 8


         TABLE 13-1.  EXCEPTION-IDENTIFICATION AND DATA REVIEW  PROGRAMS


           Program                                             Type


Exception-Generating Programs:

      1 = Audit Sample Summary                                (Lh,LL,FH,FL,FN,FS)
      2 = Laboratory/Field Blank Summary                     (B.LB.FB)
      3 = Field Duplicate Precision Summary                  (R/D  Pairs)
      4 = Instrumental Detection Limit Summary               (All  Species)
      5 = Holding Time Summary                                (All  Species)
      6 = % Conductance Difference Calculations              (All  Species)
      7 = Anion/Cation Balance  Calculations                  (All  Species)
      8 = Internal Laboratory Duplicates
      9 = Protolyte Analysis (DIC, DOC, pH, ANC, and
            BNC Data Evaluation)
     10 = Reagent/Calibration Blanks and QCCS

Data Review Programs:

      1 = Raw Data Listing - Format for QA Manager
      2 = Complete Raw Data Listing - Format for Audit Staff
      3 = Comparison of Form 1  and Form 2                      (pH and  DIC)
      4 = Comparison of Form 2  and Form 11                     (pH and  DIC)
      5 = QA and QC Flag Summary
      6 = Modified Gran Analysis Program
     One hundred percent of the analytical  data are verified,  sample  by  sample.
A routine lake sample has to meet both the anion/cation ZIBD and JCD  criteria
in order to be verified, unless the discrepancy can be  explained by either  the
presence of organic species (as indicated by the protolyte analysis program)  or
an obvious correctable reporting error.

     Values for a given analyte are flagged for every sample in a batch, even
though the verification is on a "per sample" basis, when the batch QA sample
data do not meet the acceptance criteria for QA samples such as field blanks,
field duplicates, or audit samples.  Each analyte value is also flagged  if
internal QC checks such as calibration and reagent blank analytical results,
internal duplicate precision, instrumental  detection limits, QCCS analytical
results, and required holding times do not meet specifications.  The  final
source of flags is the protolyte analysis program.  A description of  the eval-
uation of DIC, DOC, pH, ANC, and BNC data by the protolyte analysis program

-------
                                                                Section 13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 5 of 8


is given in Section 13.2.3.  In all cases, the flags that are generated by
the computer programs are reviewed by the auditor for reasonableness and
consistency before they are entered into the verified data set.

13.2.3  Computer Evaluation of PIC. DOC, pH, ANC, and BNC Data

     An evaluative computer program performs data checks and uses carbonate
equilibria and DOC data to identify analytical error and the source of
protolytes (acidic or basic species) in tne sample.  The DIG, pH, ANC, and
BNC data are rigorously evaluated in light of known characteristics of
carbonate equilibria.  DOC data are introduced to the evaluation with the
use of a theoretical model (the Oliver model - see Section 13.2.3.2) to
predict characteristics of the more complex system.  The overall process of
data evaluation based on carbonate equilibria is summarized below.

13.2.3.1  Redundant Alkalinity Checks for pH and DIC—
     Evaluations of carbonate equilibria indicate that alkalinity is not
affected by changes in dissolved C02 concentration.  Furthermore, alkalinity
can be calculated from carbonate equilibria if the DIC and pH are known.  A
theoretical alkalinity, C, is calculated from each of the three  pH/DIC pairs:

     Ci  =  pH/DIC of "closed system" syringe samples (processing laboratory)

     C£  =  pH/DIC of "open system" samples (analytical laboratory)

     C3  =  pH/DIC of "air-equilibrated system" samples (analytical
            laboratory)

     The third data pair (C3) is obtained from an aliquot that has been
equilibrated with standard air (300 ppm C02).  If there is no analytical error,
the three calculated alkalinities should agree within experimental error.  The
precision for calculated alkalinity values less than or equal to 100 ueq/L
should be within 10 ueq/L and within 10 percent for calculated alkalinity
values greater than 100 peq/L.  The precision windows are based  on the
estimated precision of the pH and DIC measurements used in the calculations.
If this comparison indicates a potential analytical error (i.e., the precision
limit is exceeded), the redundant pH and DIC values are compared to identify
the source of error.  Further evaluation of the QA and QC information for tne
individual  data pairs usually identifies one of the pH or DIC measurements
within the outlier pair as the source of error.  Because of the  redundancy in
measurement,  an acceptable pH or DIC value from one of the data  pairs should be
available to the data user for every sample that is analyzed.

13.2.3.2  Verification of Measured ANC—
     The measured ANC is evaluated by comparing it to the average of the accept-
able calculated values for alkalinity determined during the evaluation of
pH and DIC.

-------
                                                                Section  13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 6  of 8


     Carbonate Systems.  For a true carbonate system,  the  measured  ANC  should
equal (within experimental error)  the calculated alkalinity.   The measured
value for ANC and the calculated alkalinity should be  within  15 ueq/L of each
other for calculated alkalinities  less than or equal to 100 ueq/L,  and  within
10 percent for larger values.  If  the measured ANC differs from the calculated
alkalinity, an analytical error is indicated in either the titration or  in  the
pH or DIG measurements.

     Mixed Systems.  Mixed systems are those represented by samples that have
significant concentrations of other protolytes in addition to the carbonate
species.  In natural waters, organic bases derived from humic and fulvic acids
are often present and make a significant contribution  to the  ANC.  The  acidic
functional groups of natural humic substances contribute to the BNC of  natural
waters as well.  The Oliver model  is an empirical method of relating DOC, pH,
and organic protolytes in two ways (Oliver et al., 1983).   The first way
relates the total organic protolyte content to DOC, and tne second  relates  the
mass action quotient (pK0) of the  organics present to  the  sample pH.

     DOC and pH are measured in each sample.  The empirical relationships
(defined by the Oliver model) and  the measured pH and  DOC  values are used to
estimate the contribution of organic protolytes to the measured ANC.  The
measured ANC should equal, within  experimental error,  the  sum of the calculated
alkalinity and the estimated organic protolyte contribution,  assuming that
significant concentrations of other non-organic protolytes are not  present  and
there is no analytical error.  The precision should be within 15 ueq/L  for
calculated ANC less than or equal  to 100 ueq/L and within  10  percent for larger
values.

13.2.3.3  Verification of Measured BNC—
     BNC, unlike ANC, is affected  by changes in dissolved  C02 concentration.
Therefore, evaluation and verification of those data cannot utilize as  much
redundancy as that of ANC data.  Only the initial pH and DIC  values determined
in the analytical laboratory (data pair Cg) can be used to calculate BNC for
comparison with the measured value.  As with ANC, other protolytes  can  contri-
bute to the measured BNC.  An estimate of C02~acidity  is calculated from data
pairs and carbonate equilibria.  The calculated acidity should equal, within
experimental error, the measured BNC, if no other protolytes  are present.
Precision for calculated acidity values less than or equal to 100 ueq/L should
be within 10 ueq/L and within 10 percent for larger values.  If the calculated
acidity is greater than the measured BNC, an analytical error in the pH, DIC,
or BNC determination is indicated.

     The pH and DIC measurements are verified by the previous tests (QA/QC
redundancy and alkalinity checks).  If the calculated  acidity is less than  the
measured BNC, the difference may be due to the presence of other protolytes or
to an analytical  measurement error.  The Oliver model  is used to evaluate the
contribution from organic protolytes.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section 13.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 7 of 8


 13.2.3.4  System Check for Total Carbonate—
      For a carbonate system, it can be shown that the sum of alkalinity and
 acidity equals total carbonate concentration in the sample.   For a mixed
 system, it can be shown that the sum of ANC and BNC equals the total protolyte
 concentration in the sample.  Thus, the calculated values of alkalinity and
 acidity can be combined and compared to the sum of the measured ANC and BNC,
 as an additional check of the data.  For a carbonate system, the sum of ANC and
 BNC should equal, within experimental error, the total carbonate concentration
 or the sum of calculated acidity and alkalinity.  If this sum is less than the
 calculated total carbonate, an analytical error is indicated because the two
 titrations must account for all carbonate species present in the sample.  Other
 protolytes or analytical error is indicated if the sum of ANC and BNC exceeds
 the calculated total carbonate.  Again, the Oliver model  is  used to evaluate
 the data.

     The precision of the total carbonate results should be  within 15 umole/L
 for total carbonate concentrations less than or equal to 100 umole/L, and
 within 10 percent for higher concentrations.

     The protolyte analysis program generates flags (Table 12-1) based on the
 data checks described above to indicate the source of problems.

 13.2.4  Follow-up with Analytical  Laboratories

     After the review of all data has been completed, the analytical labora-
 tories are requested to submit completed copies of data reporting forms that
 were incomplete when previously submitted, to submit corrections of previously
 reported data, to confirm previous results, and to reanalyze certain samples
that do not meet QA/QC criteria.  In certain cases, the EMSL-LV QA staff may
 request that the analytical laboratory submit the raw data for a particular
 sample or batch.  These raw data are used (1) to evaluate data anomalies not
easily explained or corrected during the data review process and (2) to support
 requests for sample reanalysis or value confirmation.  The analytical labora-
tories are required to submit confirmation and reanalysis data on Form 26 (see
Appendix B).   The analytical laboratories are directed to respond within a
reasonable time so that the results can be evaluated in time for them to be
 useful to the survey.

13.2.5  Evaluation of Outliers Identified by Corvallis Staff

     During the verification process, outliers,  observations that are not
typical of the population from which the sample is drawn, that have been identi-
fied by the ERL-C staff (see Section 14.2) are examined further by the EMSL-LV
QA staff.  For any of these outliers not identified previously, confirmation of
the value is  requested from the contract analytical  laboratory.  Any value
changes are incorporated into the changed data set before it is sent to SAI.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section  6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 18
                             6.0  FIELD OPERATIONS
     Field operations are conducted from field bases under the supervision  of
a base coordinator.  Each ground crew samples one or two lakes per  day;  if
helicopters are being used,  each helicopter crew samples four to eight lakes
each day.  The processing laboratory is considered to be a part of  field opera-
tions.  The Las Vegas communications center monitors field activities  and
tracks sample shipment from the field to the processing laboratory  and from
the processing laboratory to the analytical laboratories.

     The activities of the sampling crews and the processing laboratory  are
discussed in the following sections.  More detailed descriptions of field
operations are given in the field operations report (Merritt and Sheppe, in
preparation) and the processing laboratory report (Arent et al., in preparation),

6.1  ACTIVITIES OF THE SAMPLING CREWS

     Helicopter and ground crews perform the same sampling activities.   The
helicopter crew consists of a pilot, an observer, and a sampler. The  sampler
takes all the required measurements and collects the samples.  The  observer's
responsibilities are to direct the pilot to the correct sampling location,  to
ensure that all measurements and sampling operations are performed  correctly
and that the data are accurately recorded, and to make technical decisions.
Each ground crew consists of a crew leader and a sampler.   The crew leader  is
responsible for accurate data transcription and for technical decisions. The
activities of each sampling crew are divided into (1) activities at the  field
base and (2) activities en route to or at the lake site.  A flow chart of the
sampling crew activities is shown in Figure 6-1.

6.1.1  Base Site Activities

     Prior to leaving the field base, the sampling crews perform the following
tasks:

     •  Helicopter crews prepare a detailed navigation sheet that gives  courses
        and distances for the excursion as well as the navigational coordinates
        of each lake to be sampled.  A flight plan is filed with the field  base
        coordinator (and the Federal Aviation Administration) in order to
        predict sample arrival times and as a safety precaution. Ground crews
        fill out a daily itinerary form that gives directions to the lake(s),
        lists predicted call-in and return times, and describes clothing worn
        by each member of the crew on that sampling day.  Preliminary  informa-
        tion about a lake, including latitude, longitude,  name, and status
        (regular, alternate, or special interest) is supplied by ERL-C,  local
        authorities, or the communications center in Las Vegas.  The location
        of the fall index site is indicated on a map as the preferred  sampling
        site.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
I
 I
   ACTIVITIES CONDUCTED AT

          FIELD  BASE

      BEFORE DEPARTURE

   1. PREPARE SITE DESCRIPTION.

   2. CALIBRATE HYDROLAB.

   3. CHECK SUPPLIES FOR DAY'S SAMPLING.

   4. LOAD EQUIPMENT.

   5. FILE FLIGHT PLAN OR ITINERARY WITH
     FIELD BASE COORDINATOR.
 ACTIVITIES CONDUCTED AT

        FIELD BASE

AFTER SAMPLING  EXCURSION


   1. UNLOAD SAMPLES.

   2. FILE LAKE DATA FORMS WITH
     FIELD BASE COORDINATOR.

   3. SHIP SAMPLES TO PROCESSWG
     LABORATORY.

   4. CHECK HYDROLAB CALIBRATION
     AND PERFORM REQUIRED
     EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE.
                                                                            Section  6.U
                                                                            Revision 2
                                                                            Date:    11/87
                                                                            Page  2  of  18
ACTIVITIES CONDUCTED AT

        LAKE SITE

 1. TAKE AERIAL PHOTOGRAPHS Of LAKE
   (HELICOPTER CREWS ONLY).

 2. VERIFY LAKE IDENTITY.
                                LAST LAKE
                                  TO BE
                                SAMPLED?
SAMPLING AND MEASUREMENT

         ACTIVITIES

 1. MEASURE SITE DEPTH.

 2. PROFILE CONDUCTANCE. pH AND
   TEMPERATURE. DETERMINE
   STRATIFICATION STATUS.

 3. DETERMINE SECH1 DISK
   TRANSPARENCY.

 4. PREPARE BLANK (AT FIRST LAKE ONLY).

 5. COLLECT WATER SAMPLE IN
   VAN DORN BOTTLE
  -WITHDRAW SYRMGE SAMPLES.
   -TRANSFER REMAINING SAMPLE TO A
   4-t CUBITAINER.

 6. IF NECESSARY. OBTAIN A DUPLICATE
   SAMPLE, A TRIPLICATE SAMPLE. AND ANY
   ADDITIONAL SAMPLES THAT ARE NEEDED.

 7. VERIFY THAT FORM AND LABELS ARE
   CORRECTLY FIUED OUT.
   Figure  6-1.   Flowchart  of  sampling crew activities  for  the
                     Eastern  Lake  Survey - Phase II.

-------
                                                                Section  6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  3  of 18


     •  A member of each sampling crew calibrates a Hydrolab unit,  which
        is used to obtain pH, conductance,  DO,  and temperature profiles  of each
        lake.  The Hydrolab QC procedures,  including calibration,  are described
        in Section 7.0.  Hydrolab calibration data are recorded on  the  Hydrolab
        calibration form (see Appendix A).

The sampling crews then proceed to the first lake to collect samples.

6.1.2  Lake Site Activities

     As the helicopter approaches the lake,  a member of the helicopter  crew
takes photographs of the area.  A photograph of a card showing the  date  and the
lak.  identification (ID) number precedes each set of lake photographs taken.
The photograph numbers are entered on the lake  data form (Form ID).   (Table 6-1
lists the data forms and labels used in the  field, and they are shown in
Appendix A.)  The observer notes watershed  characteristics that can be  deter-
mined from the air.  The pilot lands the helicopter at or near the  deepest part
of the lake.  This point is determined by using a combination of visual  obser-
vations from the air and a depth recorder.

     The ground crews do not photograph the  lake sites.   The lake  data  form
contains an outline of the lake, sketched previously from topographic maps.
The sampling location is marked on the sketch with an X.   The ground  crew
navigates a boat to the indicated sampling  location and locates the exact
sampling site (the deepest spot) by using a  weighted sounding line.

     NOTE:  When the sampling crew arrives  at the given coordinates,  the
            members may find conditions that require special handling.   No
            sample is taken if there is found to be:  (1) no lake,  (2)  more
            than one lake, (3) a stream or  flowing water, (4) a lake  too
            shallow to allow collection of  a debris-free water sample  (less
            than 0.75 to 1.5 m deep), (5) an inaccessible lake (usually  ice-
            covered), (6) a lake with high  conductance (greater than  1500
            uS/cm), (7) a small lake (less  than 4 ha), (8) an urban or
            industrial site, (9) a stock pond (i.e., an agricultural  watering
            pond), or (10) no permission for access.  For a multilobed  or
            dendritic lake, the observer determines the location of the best
            sampling site, following specific guidelines.

     The following operations are performed  in  the order given.  The  helicopter
pilot maintains position by visual reference to landmarks or an anchored buoy,
as conditions dictate.  The ground crew drops anchor well upwind of the sampling
site, permits the boat to drift over the site,  and secures the anchor  line.

     Step 1 - Depth Determination.  The lake depth at the sampling  site is
     determined by using an electronic depth finder (from the helicopter) or
     a calibrated sounding line (from a boat).   The result is recorded  on the
     lake data form.

-------
I
I
I
I
                                                        Section  6.0
                                                        Revision 2
                                                        Date:   11/87
                                                        Page  4  of 18


 TABLE 6-1.   DATA FORMS AND LABELS USED  IN  THE  FIELD  AND IN THE
PROCESSING LABORATORY DURING THE  EASTERN  LAKE SURVEY  -  PHASE  IIa
        Meteorological Form 1A
        Sample Collection Form IB              Spring Variability Study
        Profile Data Form 1C

        Lake Data Form ID                      Seasonal Surveys'3

        Batch/QC Field Data Form 2
        Shipping Form 3                        All Surveys
        Hydro!ab Form

        Field Sample Label
        Field Audit Sample Label
        Laboratory Audit Sample Label
        Sample Aliquot Labels (7)
        Trace Metals Sample Label              All Surveys
        Summer Survey
        Anoxics Study Sample Label
        Chlorophyll Sample Label
        EMSL Split Label
        Zooplankton Sample Label

        aForms and labels are shown in Appendix A.
        bA different modification of the form was used for each of the three seasonal
         surveys.


             Step 2 - Parameter Profile.  For spring seasonal  and fall sampling,  the pH,
             conductance, DO, and temperature measurements are taken with the Hydro!ab
             at 1.5 m below the lake surface and at 1.5 m above the lake bottom.   DO is
             measured at 1.5 m below the lake surface only, if the temperature difference
             is !ess than or equal to 4 °C,  the lake is considered unstratified.   If the
             temperature difference exceeds  4 °C, a third measurement is obtained at 60
             percent of the site depth.  If  the temperature difference between measure-
             ments at 1.5 m and at the 60 percent depth is less than 4 °C, the lake is
             classified as weakly stratified.  If the temperature difference exceeds
             4 °C, the lake is considered to be strongly stratified.  In a strongly
             stratified lake, a temperature  and conductance profile is obtained from
             measurements taken at 5-m intervals for lakes more than 20 m deep and at
             2-m intervals for lakes 20 m deep or less.  The results are recorded on
             the lake data form.

-------
                                                           Section  6.0
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page  5  of 18


During summer sampling, lake profiles are obtained in  two stages,  descend-
ing and ascending.  Care must be used not to cause mixing of the water
near boundaries, especially for stratified shallow lakes.

Descending Stage.  Temperature, conductance, pH,  and DO are measured at
0.5 m and 1.5 m below the lake surface.   Only temperature and conductance
are measured at depths below 1.5 m.   Measurements are  taken at 1-m
intervals, beginning at 0.5 m below the  lake surface,  for the first 10.5 m
of the water column.  Below 10.5 m,  readings are  taken at 2-m intervals
until  a depth of 1.5 m above the lake bottom is reached.   To avoid  damage
to the instrument and possible sediment  disturbance, the Hydrolab  sonde
unit is not lowered deeper than 1.5 m above the bottom.

NOTE:   The sonde mu?t be allowed to equilibrate in the lake water  for
       5 minutes prior to recording the  initial reading at 0.5 m below
       the surface.

     The profile obtained during the descending stage  provides the
temperature data necessary for determining the approximate depths  of
various thermal zones.  First, the top of the hypolimnion is determined.
For the purposes of the summer study, the top of  the hypolimnion is
defined as that depth which is approximately 2 °C warmer than the
temperature recorded at 1.5 m above the  lake bottom.  The depth of  the
midpoint of the hypolimnion is then calculated by taking the average
of the depth at the top of the hypolimnion and at 1.5  m above the  lake
bottom.  The metalimnion (or thermocline) is defined as the layer  of
water  between 1.5 m below the surface and the top of the hypolimnion.
The midpoint of the metalimnion is that  depth calculated as the average
of 1.5 m below the surface and the depth defined  as the top of the
hypoliminion.

Ascending Stage.  Once the thermal zones have been defined from the
temperature profile, a full Hydrolab profile (temperature, conductance,
DO, and pH) is recorded on the ascending stage for each remaining  depth
of interest (i.e., 1.5 m above the lake  bottom, mid-hypolimnion, top of
the hypolimnion, and mid-metalimnion).

     For the spring variability pilot study, lake profiling consists of
temperature, pH, and conductance measurements taken at each sampling
station.  The measurements are taken immediately  below the ice, then at
0.5-m intervals to the depth at which the water temperature reaches 4 CC.
Two measurements are made below this depth:  one  at 1.5 m above the lake
bottom and one at the mid-hypolimnion.  For the purposes of the spring
variability pilot study, the top of the  hypolimnion is defined as  the
depth in the water column where the temperature is 1 °C different  than  the
temperature measured at 1.5 m above the lake bottom.   (For the compar-
ability study mentioned ir, Section 2.1,  the ELS-I protocol and the protocol
described above are both followed at the same site.  The ELS-I protocol

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                           Section 6.0
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page 6 of 18


calls for measurements to be taken every 0.2 m until  the temperature nears
4 °C; below that depth, measurements are taken every  2 m if the site depth
is less than 20 m, or every 5 m if the site depth is  greater than 20 m.)
Field data obtained during the spring variability pilot study are recorded
on a set of forms specific to that survey (Meteorological  Form 1A, Sample
Collection Form IB, and Profile Data Form 1C - see Appendix A).

Step 3 - Determination of Secchi Disk Transparency.   A Secchi disk secured
on a calibrated line is lowered on the shady side of  the helicopter or
boat until the disk disappears from view.  The disk is then raised until
it reappears.  The depths at which the Secchi disk disappears and re-
appears are recorded on the lake data form.  Their average is the Secchi
disk transparency.  The observer must not wear sunglasses.

Step 4 - Sample Collection.  Water samples are collected in a 6.2-L Van
Dorn bottle that has been rinsed with lake water.  For spring seasonal and
fall sampling, the Van Dorn bottle is lowered to 1.5  m below the  lake
surface.  It is triggered to collect the sample, then is raised.   During
summer samp". in3, an additional sample is collected either  from the mid-
hypolimnion (in stratified lakes) or from 1.5 m above the  bottom (in
isothermal lakes).  It is imperative that air not be  introduced into
the Van Dorn bottle before steps 5 and 6 are performed.

NOTE:  Sample collection is performed on the upwind side of the
       helicopter or boat to minimize the possibility of contamination.

    For the spring variability pilot study, the Van Dorn bottle is not
immersed.  Instead, water is pumped to the surface into a  modified Van
Dorn by means of a diaphragm pump and Tygon tubing.   The equipment is
rinsed, and water samples are collected from just below the ice cover at
the littoral and pelagic stations with the lowest pH  values, at the lake
outlet, and at one or two lake inlets.  Two additional samples are collected
at the fall index site:  one from immediately below the ice cover and one
from mid-hypolimnion.

Step 5 - Collection of Syringe Samples.   A 20-mL aliquot is withdrawn
from the Luer-Lok syringe port on the Van Dorn bottle by means of a 60-mL
syringe equipped with a valve.  The syringe is rinsed with this aliquot
and the rinse water is discarded.  The rinse procedure is  repeated at
least two more times.   A 60-mL sample aliquot is withdrawn from the Van
Dorn bottle and the syringe is sealed.  Three more syringe samples are
obtained similarly.  (For the summer survey, a fifth  syringe of sample
is taken; no syringes are filled with the triplicate  sample collected
for the laboratory bias study.)  A field sample label (shown in Appendix
A) is completed and attached to each syringe.  Batch  ID and sample ID
numbers are assigned at the processing laboratory. After  the syringes
are labeled, they are placed in a plastic bag and are stored in a

-------
                                                           Section  6.0
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page  7  of 18


cooler (maintained at 4 CC).   Of the four syringes normally filled  for
each routine and duplicate sample,  two are for pH  and DIG measurements
at the processing laboratory, one is for the PCV-reactive aluminum
measurement at the processing laboratory, and one  is for  the extract-
able aluminum measurement at the analytical  laboratory.   The filled
fifth syringe from summer sample collection  is for the anoxics  study
iron and manganese determinations.

Step 6 - Sample Transfer.   A clean  4-L Cubita^er  is rinsed with three
500-mL portions of sample.  The Cubitainer is filled with sample,  is
compressed to remove all headspace, and is capped  securely.  The field
sample label is completed and attached.  After the- rubitainer is labeled
(and identification is written on the Cubitainer wall itself),  it  is
stored in the cooler.

Step 7 - Duplicate Sample Collection.  At an assigned lake each  day, one
crew from each field base site (as  assigned  by the field  base coordinator)
collects a duplicate sample by repeating steps 4 through  6.  On  the label
(see Appendix A), sample type "Duplicate" is checked.

Step 8 - Collection of Field Blank  Samples.   One field blank is  prepared
at the first lake visited each day  by one crew from each  of two  field
bases.  In place of step 4, the Van Dorn sampler is rinsed with  three
200-mL portions of deionized water  and is filled with deionized  water.
Step 6 is performed as for a routine lake water sample.   The sample type
"Blank" is checked on the field sample label.  Two syringes are  filled
with sample for the aluminum determinations  before the Cubitainer  is
filled.

Step 9 - Collection of Additional Samples for the  Summer  Survey.   A
triplicate sample is collected for  the laboratory  bias study from  1.5 m
below the surface during the summer sampling.  Summer sampling also
includes collection of samples for  chlorophyll and zooplankton determi-
nations, and, as mentioned in step  5, samples for  the anoxics study.
The chlorophyll sample is drawn from the residual  sample  collected in the
Van Dorn from 1.5 m below the surface.  Anoxics study samples are  taken
from the lake water collected in the Van Dorn bottle from mid-hypolimnion
or from 1.5 m above the bottom.  In addition, three zooplankton tows are
taken.

Step 10 - Equipment and Sample Storage.  Upon completion  of steps  1 through
9, the Hydrolab sonde and the Van Dorn bottle are  rinsed  with deionized
water and are stored securely in the boat or helicopter.   The observer  or
crew leader verifies that the data  form or forms are properly completed
and that all containers are sealed  tightly and are correctly labeled.

Step 11 - Sampling at Subsequent Lake Sites.  The  helicopter or ground
crew proceeds to the next lake where the sampling  and measurement

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section 6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 8 of 18


     activities are repeated.  The helicopter is refueled, when necessary,
     at remote airports or by fuel truck.

     Step 12 - Return to Field Base.  When there is insufficient time  remaining
     to sample another lake, the helicopter and ground crews return to the
     field base.  The Hydrolab calibration is checked at the end of each day,
     and results are noted on the calibration form.  The manufacturer's
     instructions for care and maintenance of the pH electrodes are followed.
     The rechargeable batteries are charged overnight, and the probes  are
     stored in tap water except for the pH reference electrode, which  is stored
     in 3M KC1.

6.2  PROCESSING LABORATORY OPERATIONS

     This section descrioes the processing laboratory activities outlined in
Figure 6-2.  Samples are shipped after each day of sampling from the field
bases to the processing laboratory in Las Vegas, Nevada.  The processing lab-
oratory is staffed by a laboratory coordinator, a laboratory supervisor, and
analysts.   The laboratory coordinator is responsible for the overall operation
of the processing laboratory (including sample tracking and logistics, data
management, and safety).  The laboratory supervisor, with the aid of the
analysts,  is responsible for analytical measurements and sample processing.
Six work stations are arranged for these operations:  pH and DIG determina-
tions, flow injection analyses (FIA), methyl  isobutyl ketone (MIBK) extrac-
tions, sample filtration, sample preservation, and logistics.  Depending on
the sample load, one individual may fill more than one position, or more than
one analyst may be assigned to a particular position.  When possible,  the
laboratory coordinator also assists with sample processing.

     Processing laboratory operations are described in detail in Hillman et al.
(1986) and in Arent et al. (in preparation),  which summarizes the protocols
in the unpublished processing laboratory manual (Chaloud et al., 1986); the
procedure for determining PCV-reactive aluminum species also is presented in
Kerfoot et al.  (in final preparation).

6.2.1  Reagent Preparation

     Reagents for aluminum extraction and DIG, pH, and PCV-reactive aluminum
determination are prepared daily prior to sample arrival.

6.2.2  Sample Processing

     The following steps describe the sample  processing operations. They are
performed  in the order given.  Unless otherwise stated, these treatments and
analyses apply to all routine,  duplicate, field blank, and field audit samples.
For all  determinations (see Sections 6.2.2.2, 6.2.2.5, 6.2.2.6, 6.2.2.7, and
6.2.2.8) results are recorded on the Batch/QC Field Data Form,  Form 2  (see
Appendix A).   Copies of all raw data are sent to the QA manager when requested
or at the  completion of survey operations.

-------
                                                                             Section  6.0
                                                                             Revision 2
                                                                             Date:   11/87
                                                                             Page 9  of  18
PREPARATION Of REAGENTS
   FOR PROCESSING

LABORATORY OPERATIONS
              INSTRUMENT

               WARM-UP

            AND CALIBRATION
                      RECEIPT OF FIELD
                    SAMPLES BY LABORATORY
                       COORDINATOR,
                      ORGANIZATION OF
                      SAMPLE BATCHES
                               BULK SAMPLES

                              TO ANALYSTS
                                                 1 SYRINGE TO
                                                 ANALYTICAL
                                                  CHEMIST
                                               TURBIDITY

                                             DETERMINATION
                                                               ALIQUOT
                                                              PREPARATION
                                                            AND PRESERVATION
                     DATA TRANSFER
                        FORM 2
                                                                       PREPARATION
                                                                       OF SOLUTIONS

                                                                      FOR FIELD CREWS
                    SHIPMENT OF FORMS
                  (SAME DAY OR NEXT DAY)
                                     SHIPMENT
                                    OF SAMPLE
                                     ALIOUOTS
     Figure  6-2.
Flowchart  of  processing  laboratory activities for the
      Eastern  Lake Survey -  Phase  II.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section 6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 10 of 18

 6.2.2.1  Sample Description and Identification—
     Samples are organized into batches.  Each batch contains 20 to 30 routine,
 duplicate, blank, and audit samples collected on a given day for a single
 survey,  the samples in a batch are processed together.  Each batch is assigned
 a unique batch ID number, which is recorded on the labels of all samples (and
 of corresponding aliquots).  Then, each sample is randomly assigned a  sample ID
 number.  The sample ID numbers run consecutively from 1 to the total number of
 samples in the batch.  The audit samples must not always be assigned the same
 sample ID number.  The batch and sample ID numbers and the sample types (indi-
 cated by the codes given in Table 6-2) are recorded on the batch form.  Descrip-
 tions of each sample type and of the procedures used for apportioning  and
 identifying each sample type are given below.

 6.2.2.1.1  Routine Samples—One sample ID number is assigned to all th
-------
                                                                  Section 6.0
                                                                  Revision  2
                                                                  Date:   11/87
                                                                  Page 11 of  18
TABLE 6-2.   SAMPLE CODES  USED  FOR THE  EASTERN  LAKE SURVEY -  PHASE  II

              Sample Type                 Code            Description


Routine lake  sample                        R

Duplicate lake sample                      D

Field blank sample                         B

Processing laboratory (trailer) blank      TB

Processing laboratory (trailer) duplicate   TD

Triplicate lake  sample                     S

Audit                                 F L  1-1
                                            |	 ID number of audit sample
                                                   preparation laboratory

                                            	 Concentrate lot number

                                            	Concentration level/audit type
                                                     L - low
                                                     H « high
                                                     N • natural
                                                     S • synthetic

                                            	 Type of audit sample
                                                     F - field audit sample
                                                     L « laboratory audit
                                                         sample
                                                     RW * simulated rainwater
                                                         audit sample
                                                    Anoxics study sample sent to
                                                    the University of Indiana.
                                                    (Anoxics study sample sent
                                                    to Las Vegas does not
                                                    receive this code).

                                                    Chlorophyll sample

                                                    Trace metals sample


                                                    Zooplankton sample

                                                    Total nitrogen and
                                                    total phosphorus
                                                    sample
G

H


Z

P

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 12 of 18
  TABLE 6-3.  ALIQUOTS, CONTAINERS, PRESERVATIVES, AND CORRESPONDING ANALYSES,
                         EASTERN LAKE SURVEY - PHASE IIa
      Aliquot
(Container Volume)
       Preservative
           and
       Description
                                                                 Analyses
    (250 ml)

        2
    (15 ml)

        3
    (250 ml)
        4
    (125 ml)
    (500 ml)
    (125 ml)
Filtered, preserved with
HN03 to pH <2

Filtered, extracted with
MIBK-HQ
                                                            Ca, Mg, K, Na, Mn,
                                                            Fe

                                                            Extractable AT
Filtered, no preservative       Cl~, total dissolved
                                F~. S042', N03',
                                Si02

Filtered, preserved with        DOC, NH4+
H2S04 to pH <2

Unfiltered, no preservative     pH, BNC, ANC
                                conductance, DIC

Unfiltered, preserved with      Total P
H2S04 to pH <2

Unfiltered, preserved with      Total Al
HN03 to pH <2
    (125 mL)

aAliquots 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 must be stored at 4 °C in the dark.
sample ID numbers are recorded on each of the seven aliquot labels and on the
split sample labels.  The date and amount of preservative also are recorded on
the label.

     After the batch and sample ID numbers are assigned and are recorded on
each sample label, the same information is entered on the batch form.   The lake
ID and the appropriate code for each sample (from Table 6-2)  also are  entered
on the batch form.  Then the temporary labels on the laboratory audit  sample
aliquots, including portions for special  studies, are placed  in the laboratory
audit logbook.

6.2.2.1.5  Chlorophyll Audit Samples—A referee chlorophyll sample, which is
the material trapped on a 45-um filter after passing 250 mL of Lake Mead water
through the filter, is added to each batch of chlorophyll samples.  Therefore,
about three referee samples are included in the weekly shipment of chlorophyll
samples to the laboratory that analyzes them.  The same number of referee

-------
                                                                Section  6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  13  of  18
          TABLE 6-4.   SAMPLES FOR SPECIAL STUDIES CONDUCTED  DURING THE
                         EASTERN LAKE SURVEY - PHASE  II
 Destination
   Volume
     Number
  Processing; Analytes
University of
Indiana
University of
10-15 mL
10-15 mL
All samples
Anoxics study
Filtered, pH <2 w/HN03;
Pb, Cd, Ni, Mn, and Cu
Syringe-filtered, pH <2
Indiana
Freshwater
Institute
(Canada)
Oak Ridge
National
Laboratory
(Tennessee)

Academy of
Natural
Sciences
(Philadelphia)

EMSL-LV
EMSL-LV
  filter
  filter
3x250 mL
  125 mL
  (in HC1-
   washed
   bottle)

  60-125 mL
                samples
Chlorophyll  routine,
duplicate, audit,
and referee
samples

Chlorophyll
audit and referee
samples only
Zooplankton samples
(3 tows per lake)
no true duplicates,
no blanks or audits

All samples
(summer survey
 only)
Anoxics study
samples
w/HN03; Pb, Cd, Ni,  Mn,
and Cu

250 mL unpreserved sample
filtered, filter stored at
-20 °C in dark; chlorophyll
250 mL unpreserved sample
filtered, filter stored at
-20 °C in dark; chlorophyll
Filtered (net tow),
preserved with 4 percent
formalin/sucrose;
zooplankton

Unfiltered, pH <2 w/H2S04;
total N and total P
Syringe-filtered, pH <2
w/HN03; Fe and Mn
samples is shipped to a second laboratory for analysis.   A standard chlorophyll
extract, obtained from EMSL-Cincinnati, is analyzed by both laboratories after
all of the survey samples have been analyzed.

6.2.2.1.6  Rainwater Audit Samples—For the fall seasonal survey, simulated
rainwater samples are included in the audit sample schedule so that the amount
of absolute bias, if any, can be assessed.  Two formulations of rainwater audit
samples are used, and the compositions are certified by the National Bureau of
Standar'4: (NBS).  To avoid contaminating the NBS samples, the containers are
not opened at the processing laboratory; the labels are changed and the samples

-------
                                                                Section  6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  14  of 18


are sent to the analytical laboratory in the same containers  in  which  they were
received.

6.2.2.2  DIG Determination--
     Immediate ly after assignment of batch and sample ID numbers,  one  analyst
begins the DIG analyses.   The routine and duplicate  samples for  DIC determina-
tion are contained in sealed syringes that were filled at the lake site.  For
field audit samples, a syringe sample is taken from  the 2-L sample.  The QC
procedures for DIC analysis are discussed in Section 7.2.1.

6.2.2.3   Sample Filtration, Preservation, and Aliquot Preparation-
     All manipulations are performed under a laminar flow hood by  analysts
wearing gloves.  Sample filtration and preservation  are described  in the
processing laboratory report (Arent et a!., in preparation) and  Hillman  et al.
(1986).  Seven aliquots and any required additional  sample portions are  prepared
from each bulk sample as  specified in Table 6-3.

     Several  types of special samples are collected  or prepared  for specific
purposes.  The types of special samples and the destinations  to  which  they are
sent are given in Table 6-4.  For all surveys, 10-to-15-mL splits  of  all  samples
are shipped to the University of Indiana for determination of lead, cadmium,
nickel, manganese, and copper.   These splits are  processed in the  same manner
as aliquot 1.

     For the summer survey only, additional samples  are needed for four  special
studies:

     c  Concern exists that the oxidation of iron and manganese  in anoxic
        hypolimnetic samples could result in the  formation of large colloids
        that would be removed from the sample during filtration; a study is
        included in the summer survey to determine if hypolimnetic samples are
        anoxic, if large  colloids are formed, and how to avoid the problems
        these occurrences would present.   This study requires collecting
        hypolimnetic samples in syringes through  0.45 pm filters without exposing
        the samples to the atmosphere, then immediately preserving them.  The
        samples are preserved with nitric acid that  has been  placed in the
        125-mL aliquot bottles into which the anoxic samples  are transferred.
        A 15-mL portion of the sample is taken from  each bottle  and is shipped
        to the University of Indiana for analysis.   The remaining  sample is
        analyzed at EMSL-LV.

     e  At the processing laboratory, the chlorophyll  a samples  collected at
        the lake site are placed in a freezer at  -20 T, assigned  identification
        numbers, and put  in batches.   Additional  QA  samples are  assigned to
        each  batch as described in Section 6.2.2.1.

-------
                                                                Section  6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page  15  of 18


     °  A 125-mL split of each routine,  duplicate,  audit,  and  blank sample is
        processed for analysis of total  nitrogen and total  phosphorus.   The
        splits are preserved with sulfuric acid  and are  shipped  daily under
        refrigeration to EMSL-LV for analysis.

     •  Zooplankton tows are treated with a sucrose/formalin preservative in
        the field; at the processing laboratory  they are logged  in  and are stored
        at room temperature until the end of the survey, when  they  are shipped
        for analysis to the Academy of Natural Sciences  in  Philadelphia.

6.2.2.4  Preparation of Aliquots for Determination  of Extractable Aluminum-
     One or two analysts begin this procedure at the same time that the  DIG
measurements are begun.  The aluminum in a filtered (0.45-um pore size)  sample
is complexed with 8-OH quinoline, and the complex is extracted from the  sample
into an methyl issbatyl ketone (MIBK) layer.  The MIBK extract is transferred
to a 15-mL centrifuge tube, which is capped tightly.  An aliquot label is
attached to the tube.  This is aliquot 2 in Table 6-3.  The aliquot is stored
at 4 "C in the dark until shipment.

6.2.2.5  pH Determination—
     The pH of a sample is determined on a sample portion drawn  from  one of the
syringes, after the sample reaches room temperature.  Portions of the sample
from the other syringes are needed only if the process must be repeated  or
instrument stabilization is extremely slow.  The QC procedures for  pH deter-
mination are discussed in Section 7.2.2.

     NOTE:  pH is also measured in situ with the Hydrolab during field
            operations.

6.2.2.6  Turbidity Determination--
     A Monitek Model 21 laboratory nephelometer  is  used  to determine  the
turbidity of the samples.  The nephelometer is calibrated directly  in
nephelometric turbidity units (NTU).  The QC procedures  for turbidity
determination are discussed in Section 7.2.3.

6.2.2.7  True Color Determination--
     After centr ifugation of the sample to remove turbidity, the color is
determined using the Hach Model CO-1 Color Test  Kit, following the  manufac-
turer's instructions.  The QC procedures for true color  determination are
discussed in Section 7.2.4.

6.2.2.8  Determination of PCV-Reactive Aluminum--
     Two dissolved aluminum fractions in the routine, duplicate, blank,  and
field audit samples are measured simultaneously  with a Lachat  automated  flow
injection analyzer (FIA).  One fraction is the aluminum in the sample that
reacts with PCV.  The other fraction, isolated by passing a portion of sample
through a cation-exchange column to remove inorganic monomeric a".uii-.^tiir,, is the
relatively nontoxic, nonexchangeable PCV-reactive organoaluminum fraction.   If

-------
                                                                Section 6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 16 of 18


desired, the amount of aluminum toxic to fish, the inorganic monomeric fraction,
then can be determined indirectly by subtraction.

     In the FIA procedure, hydroxylamine hydrochloride is added to the carrier
stream of deionized water to bind any iron present that would interfere with
the determination of PCV-reactive aluminum.  PCV is added to complex the
aluminum, and the stream is buffered to maximize the formation of the complex.
As the sample passes through the flow cell of a colorimeter, the intensity of
the complex color is measured.  The complete procedure used for determination
of PCV-reactive aluminum is given in Chaloud et al. (1986) and in Kerfoot et
al. (in final preparation).  The QC procedures for PCV-reactive aluminum deter-
mination are discussed in Section 7.2.5.

6.2.2.9  Sample Shipment--
     When a batch has been processed completely and is ready for shipment, the
samples are assembled into groups according to tneir shipping destination.
Special samples (see Section 6.2.2.3.1) are shipped to:  EMSL-LV (daily);
Oak Ridge National Laboratory, Tennessee (biweekly); Freshwater Institute,
Canada (biweekly); University of Indiana (last day of survey); Academy of
Natural Sciences, Philadelphia (last day of survey).  All other samples
are shipped daily to the contract analytical laboratories.

     Prior to shipping, six of the aliquots from each sample are individually
taped and bagged and then are put together in a Ziploc bag, which is placed in
a Styrofoam-lined shipping carton.  Eight to twelve frozen freeze-gel  packs are
placed in the cooler as well, in order to maintain the aliquots at 4 °C.  The
MIBK aliquots are shipped in a separate cooler.  One set of the shipping form
(Form 3, Appendix A) is completed for each batch, and two of the copies (sealed
in a Ziploc bag) are enclosed in the carton.  The carton is sealed and is
shipped by overnight delivery service to its destination.

     Upon receiving the shipment, the analytical laboratory personnel  check the
temperature and condition of the containers and verify that all the sample
aliquots listed on the shipping form are included in the shipment.  If any
discrepancies exist, the processing laboratory coordinator must be notified
immediately.

6.2.2.10  Data Distribution--
     One copy of each of the field forms (except shipping forms from the spring
surveys) is kept at the processing laboratory.  Other copies are sent to the
locations indicated in Figure 6-3.

     One copy of each shipping form is sent to the EPA Sample Management Office
(SMO),  which is responsible for disbursements to the analytical laboratories
and levying of penalties when appropriate.  Two copies of the shipping form are
sent with the samples to the analytical laboratory.  Upon receipt of the samples
by the analytical ".-.^.rdtory, the condition of the samples is noted on the
shipping forms, one copy of which is forwarded immediately to SMO.  The original
shipping form is sent to the QA manager.

-------
                                                           Section  6.0
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page  17  of 18
   ANALYTICAL
   LABORATORY
                        Form 3 (one copy)
            Form 3
           (one copy)
          Form 3
        (one copy)
  SAMPLE
MANAGEMENT
   OFFICE
    QA
  MANAGER
                           PROCESSING
                           LABORATORY
                        (Keeps one copy of
                        Forms 1 and 3
                        [summer and fall
                        surveys only] and
                        Form 2
                         [all surveys])
                  Form 3
                Forms 1 and 2
                (originals and one
                copy of each);
Form 3 (one copy)
                                 Forms 1 and 2 • (originals)
                              DATA
                              BASE
Figure 6-3.  Eastern Lake  Survey - Phase II field data flow  scheme.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 6.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 18 of 18


     After the laboratory analyses have been completed,  the results  are sent to
the data base manager (SAI)  via the QA staff.   QA procedures related to the
transfer of data into the data base are discussed in Section 12.0.

6.3  TRAINING

     All personnel  are trained prior to each survey.  Safety procedures and
regulations, field  base operations, and processing laboratory analytical proce-
dures are the chief subjects of instruction.  Training includes classes and
realistic simulations of actual activities to be performed.  These  simulations
include helicopter  and boat  sampling on a lake and sample preparation in the
processing laboratory.  Cardiopulmonary resuscitation training and  first aid
certification are provided as well.

-------
                                                                Section  7.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  1  of 7
                 7.0  FIELD MEASUREMENT QUALITY CONTROL  CHECKS
     Field measurements are made by the field crews at the lake  sites  and  are
described in the field operations manuals.   The QC checks  for  these  measurements
are presented in Section 7.1.   Section 7.2  delineates  the  QC checks  for  the
measurements made in the processing laboratory.

7.1  LAKE SITE MEASUREMENTS

     The lake site measurements consist of  three Hydrolab  determinations (lake-
water temperature, pH, and conductance), Secchi disk transparency,  ai- tempera-
ture, and site depth.  During sampling for  the seasonal  surveys,  DO  also is
measured with the Hydrolab.  All measurements are recorded on  the lake data
form.

7.1.1  Hydrolab

     The Hydrolab is used to measure in situ lake-water temperature,  pH, and
conductance.  Seasonal sampling includes an in situ DO measurement.

     The QC protocol for Hydrolab measurements consists of two steps:  (1)
calibrating the Hydrolab before each sampling trip and (2) measuring quality
control check samples (QCCS) for pH and conductance at the field base  and  at
the lake site to verify that no drift is occurring in  the  instrumental response.

     0  Calibration.  The calibration procedures are performed in a  controlled-
        temperature environment so that the calibration solutions are  at thermal
        equilibrium.  Standard buffer solutions of pH  4.00 and 7.00  are  used  to
        calibrate the potentiometer of the  Hydrolab; for conductance,  a  standard
        solution of 147 uS/cm is used to calibrate the conductivity  cell;  for
        DO, the calibration standard is water-saturated air.   The calibration
        for the temperature function is set at the factory to  ±0.2 °C, and no
        daily calibration is needed.  The accuracy is  checked  each day against
        a thermometer that meets tolerances set by the National  Bureau of
        Standards (NBS); if an error of 1 °C or more is found, the manufacturer
        shou^ be consulted.  An error of this siz^ usually indicates  a  malfunc-
        tion of the instrument.  Back-up Hydrolabs are available so  that a unit
        that does not meet the calibration  criteria need not be used.

     •  Quality Control Checks.  Three kinds of QCCS solutions are used  to
        check the stability of the Hydrolab response.   Immediately after the
        calibration has been completed and  again at the end of the day's
        sampling, a QCCS of C02~saturated water is analyzed for pH and
        conductance in a controlled-temperature environment.   The observed
        values for the two measurements are recorded and compared to the
        theoretical values ai the given temperature and pressure.  (The
        theoretical pH and conductance values are given in the field operations

-------
                                                                Section  7.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 2 of 7


        manuals.)  If the observed values differ from the theoretical  values by
        more than ±0.15 pH units or ±20 uS/cm,  the instrument is cleaned and
        inspected, the calibration is repeated, and the QCCS is reanalyzed.  If
        the results are still unsatisfactory, the troubleshooting guide  and the
        instrument manual are consulted, and the day's data are flagged  with a
        data qualifier.

        In the field, a dilute sulfuric acid solution with a pH of 4.00  is used
        for the pH QCCS, and a potassium chloride solution of 147 uS/cm ii used
        for the conductance QCCS.  The QCCS results are recorded, but  the
        instrument is not adjusted in response to field QCCS measurements.  If
        the pH differs by more than ±0.20 pH unit or the conductance differs by
        more than ±20 uS/cm from the expected value, the discrepancy is  noted
        on the lake data form.  No QCCS solutions for DO are analyzed  in the
        field.

7.1.2  Secchi  Disk Transparency

     Secchi disk transparency measurements are taken on the shady side of the
helicopter or  boat.  The observer must not wear sunglasses.  Care must be taken
to leave the sediment on the lake bottom undisturbed.

7.1.3   Air Temperature. Site Depth, and Elevation

     Helicopter crews measure air temperature with a thermistor mounted  on the
outside of the helicopter.  An electronic depth sounder mounted inside the
helicopter is  used to determine the deepest part of the lake.  The depth
recorder is checked daily against a calibrated sounding line.

     The helicopter altimeter reading is used to confirm the map reading of
site elevation; if a discrepancy occurs, it is  recorded on the lake data form.
The pilot checks the calibration of the altimeter against the value reported at
a local airport.  The frequency of this check is based on the pilot's  discretion
and his experience with the aircraft.

     Ground crews measure the air temperature with a hand-held thermometer.
The sampling site is located with a weighted sounding line.  Elevation is
determined from topographic maps and local sources.

7.2  PROCESSING LABORATORY MEASUREMENTS

     DIC, pH,  turbidity, PCV-reactive aluminum, and true color are measured at
the processing laboratory.  The data are recorded on the batch form.  The QC'
procedures are described in detail in Hillman et al. (1986), Kerfoot et  al. (in
final  preparation), and Chaloud et al. (1986) and are summarized below.

-------
                                                                Section 7.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 7
7.2.1  Determination of Dissolved  Inorganic  Carbon
     DIG is measured in routine,  duplicate,  and  field  audit  samples using the
Dohrman Model  DC-80 carbon analyzer.   QC steps are  incorporated  into the
measurement sequence as follows:

     Step 1.   Initial  calibration is  performed by measuring  the  DIC
     calibration standard (10.00  mg/L C).

     Step 2.   Two QCCS solutions  (2.00 mg/L  C and 20.00 mg/L C)  are measured
     to verify the initial calibration.

     Step 3.   If the measured values  of both QCCS solutions  are  within  10
     percent  of the theoretical concentrations,  the values are entered  in the
     DIC logbook and analysis proceeds.   If  the  standards are not within 10
     percent  of the theoretical concentrations,  then steps 1 and 2 are
     repeated.

     Step 4.   A calibration tPank is  measured.

     Step 5.   If the measured value of the calibration blank is  less than 0.1
     mg/L C,  the value is recorded and sample analysis continues.  If the
     measured  value of the calibration blank is  0.1 mg/L C or greater,  then  (1)
     the laboratory supervisor is informed,  (2)  corrective action is taken,  and
     (3) steps 1 through 5 are repeated.  Normally, one calibration blank is
     analyzed  per batch.

     Step 6.   DIC is measured for 10  samples.

     Step 7.   A 2.0 mg/L C QCCS is analyzed  to check the calibration.

     Step 8.   If the QCCS is within 10 percent of theoretical concentration,
     the value is recorded in the logbook and sample analysis proceeds.  If  the
     QCCS is  not within 10 percent of the theoretical  concentration, it should
     be determined whether sufficient volume remains of the  samples associated
     with the  unacceptable QCCS to reanalyze them.   If enough sample is
     available, steps 1 through 7 are repeated,  including reanalysis of all
     samples  since the last acceptable QCCS. If the sample  volume is in-
     sufficient for reanalysis, the unacceptable QCCS  value  is recorded in the
     DIC logbook and the sample ID numbers associated  with the unacceptable
     QCCS are  noted on the batch  form with a data qualifier  ("tag").  The use
     of NSWS  data qualifiers is described in Section 9.7.  Sample analysis must
     not continue until acceptable QCCS values are  obtained.

     Step 9.   One sample per batch is measured in duplicate. These duplicates
     are called trailer duplicates.   If the  difference between the two  measure-
     ments is  greater thai. 1C percent, another sample  is measured in duplicate.

-------
                                                                Section  7.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  4  of 7


     If the difference is still  greater than 10 percent,  the  laboratory
     supervisor must be notified,  and the problem is  noted on the  batch  form.

     Step 10.  When sample analysis is complete,  a final  QCCS is analyzed, and
     the relevant QC information is recorded on the batch form.

7.2.2  Determination of pH

     pH is determined in routine,  duplicate, and field  audit  samples  with an
Orion Model 611 pH meter and an  Orion Ross epoxy-body combination  pH  electrode.
The QC steps are incorporated into the measurement sequence as follows:

     Step 1.  A one-point temperature check is  performed  daily;  once  a week,
     a two-point temperature check is performed.

     Step 2.  The instrument is  standardized according  to the manufacturer's
     instructions.

     Step 3.  The pH of the NBS-traceable pH 4.00 and pH  7.00 buffers is
     measured, and the results are recorded in  the logbook.   If  either
     measurement differs from the  certified value by  more than 0.02 pH  unit,
     steps 2 and 3 are repeated.   If acceptable results cannot be  obtained,
     the electrode is replaced and the above procedure  is repeated.

     NOTE:   Two pH meters are used when the number of samples in a batch exceeds
     20.  In this instance, a dilute buffer check is  performed to  assure that
     results are comparable.   The  dilute buffer check is  described in detail in
     Chaloud et al.  (1986).

     Step 4.  When satisfactory  results have been obtained for the buffers, the
     pH of a pH 4.00 QCCS is measured and the result  is recorded in the  logbook.
     If the reading differs from 4.0 by more than 0.1 pH  unit, steps  2  and 3
     are repeated, and the pH of a fresh QCCS is  measured.  If acceptable
     results still are not obtained, the laboratory supervisor is  consulted.
     Lake samples are not analyzed until  an acceptable  value  for the  QCCS has
     been obtained.

     Step 5.  Samples are measured for pH.   A pH  4.00 QCCS is measured after
     every five samples.   During the summer survey, a pH  4.00 QCCS is measured
     after every 10 samples or at  the midpoint  of each  batch, whichever  is the
     fewer number of samples.  The results are  recorded in the logbook.   If the
     measured pH of the QCCS is  4.0 ± 0.1,  measurement  of samples  proceeds.

     Step 6.  If the QCCS is  not acceptable, it should  be determined  whether
     sufficient sample volume remains in any syringes to  repeat  the analysis.
     If so,  steps 2 through 4 are  repeated and  all  samples analyzed since the
     last acceptable QCCS are reanalyzed.   If insufficient sample  remains,
     the sample ID numbers associated with the  unacceptable QCCS are  recorded

-------
                                                               Section 7.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 5 of 7


     in the logbook.   Steps 2 through  4  are  repeated  before  proceeding with
     sample analysis.

     Step 7.   If two  pH  meters are  being used,  a  dilute  buffer  check is
     performed after  each QCCS analysis.

     Step 8.   One sample per batch  is  measured  in duplicate.   If  the difference
     between  the two  measurements  is greater than 0.1 pH  unit,  another sample
     is measured in duplicate.   If  the difference is  still greater than 0.1 pH
     unit, the laboratory supervisor must be notified, and the  problem is noted
     on the batch form by means of  a data qualifier  (see  Section  9.7).

     Step 9.   Each processing laboratory measurement  must be within 0.5 pH unit
     of the measurement on the same sample taken  in  the  field.  If the mea-
     surement is outside this range, the processing  laboratory  measurement is
     repeated.  If the reanalysis  is within  0.1 pH unit  of the  first measure-
     ment, the value  is  recorded and qualified  and the field crew is notified
     of a potential problem with the field pH meter.   If  the reanalysis is not
     within 0.1 pH unit  of the first measurement, the analysis  is repeated a
     third time.

     Step 10.   After the last sample  in a batch  has  been analyzed, a final
     QCCS is  analyzed, a dilute buffer check is performed if two  meters are
     being used, and  the values are recorded in a logbook.

     Step 11.  When the  pH measurements  are  completed, the relevant QC infor-
     mation is recorded on the batch form.

7.2.3  Determination  of  Turbidity

     Turbidity is determined in routine, duplicate,  blank, and  field audit
samples with  a Monitek Model 21 laboratory nephelometer.  The QC  steps are
incorporated  into the measurement  sequence as follows:

     Step 1.   The nephelometer is  zeroed while  set on range  2 and then is
     calibrated on range 20 with a  suspended polymeric standard of 10.0
     nepnelometric turbidity units  (NTU), following  the  manufacturer's
     recommendations.

     Step 2.   Calibration linearity is verified by analyzing 2.0, 5.0, and 20.0
     NTU QCCS.  (The  20.0 NTU QCCS  is  measured  on range  200.)  The measured
     values must be 2.0 ± 0.2, 5.0  ± 0.5, and 20.0 ± 2.0 NTU.  If the measured
     values are unacceptable, step  1 is  repeated. Acceptable results must be
     obtained prior to sample analysis.   Acceptable  results  for the 5.0 NTU
     QCCS are recorded on the batch form.

     Step 3.   After every 10 samples,  a  5.0  NTU QCCS is  measured.  If the
     measured value is 5.0 ± 0.5 NTU,  the QCCS  and sample results are recorded
     on the batch form.   During the summer survey, a 5.0 NTU QCCS is measured

-------
                                                                Section 7.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 7


     after every 10 samples or at the midpoint of each batch,  whichever is
     the fewer number of samples.

     Step 4.  If the QCCS measurement is unacceptable, the instrument  must be
     recalibrated and the previous 10 samples must be reanalyzed.   Acceptable QC
     values are recorded on the batch form along with the associated sample
     results.  All  measurements are reported for range 20.  Samples with low
     turbidity are measured on range 2; results for range 2 are recorded in
     the laboratory notebook but not on the batch form.

     Step 5.  A trailer duplicate sample is analyzed.  The duplicate result
     must be within 10 percent of the result for the associated routine
     sample.  If the results are not within 10 percent of each other,  another
     sample is analyzed in duplicate.  If acceptable results still  are not
     obtained, the laboratory supervisor is notified and a data qualifier (see
     Section 9.7) is recorded on the batch form with the results.

7.2.4  Determination of True Color

     True color is determined with a color comparator (Hack Model  CO-1 Color
Test Kit).   The only QC check on true color measurements is that one sample per
batch is measured in duplicate.  If the two measurements differ by  more than  10
PCU, another sample is measured in duplicate.  If acceptable results still are
not obtained, the laboratory supervisor must be notified and a data qualifier
(see Section 9.7) must be recorded on the batch form with the  results.  Acceptable
results also are recorded on the batch form.

7.2.5  Determination of PCV-Reactive Aluminum

     QC steps are incorporated into the PCV-reactive aluminum  procedure for
measurement as follows:

     Step 1.  The FIA is calibrated with a set of standards with aluminum
     concentrations of 0 (an acidified blank), 25, 100,  200, and 350 ug/L.
     Starting with  the lowest concentration standard, each standard is analyzed
     twice in succession.  The observed values must be within  10 percent of the
     theoretical  values, and the correlation coefficient must  be at least
     0.995, or the instrument must be recalibrated.

     Step 2.  A QCCS of 75 ug/L aluminum is analyzed.  The observed value
     must be within 10 percent of the theoretical value (within the range of
     67.5 to 82.5 ug/L).  If the results for this or any later QCCS do not meet
     the criteria,  the instrument must be recalibrated.

     Step 3.  If high concentrations of aluminum are anticipated in the
     samples, a second calibration is needed.  The standards used  for  the
     high-range calibration have aluminum concentrations of 300, 500,  750,
     100U,  and 6000 ug/L.  The analytical procedure for  the high-range
     calibration is the same as for the normal calibration.  After  the

-------
                                                           Section  7.0
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page  7  of 7


high-range calibration is completed,  a 75 ug/L  QCCS  and  a  600  ug/L  QCCS
are analyzed.  Results for both QCCSs must be within 10  percent  of  the
theoretical values.

Step 4.  A natural audit sample with  a known level of nonexchangeable
aluminum is analyzed to check the performance of  the exchange  column.
The measured value for nonexchangeable aluminum must be  within 20
percent of the known value.   If the measured value is not  within the
required range, the column must be replaced or  repacked.

Step 5.  Ten samples are analyzed.  If the aluminum  concentration  of any
sample exceeds 350 ug/L, a 600 ug/L QCCS must be  analyzed  with the next
75 ug/L QCCS routine check.

Step 6.  After every ±0 samples and after the last sample,  a 75  ug/L QCCS
is analyzed with and without the exchange column.  If the  observed value
is within the range of 67.5  to 82.5 ug/L, the value  is recorded  in the
logbook and analysis continues.  If the range is  not met,  the  QCCS is
reanalyzed; if the range still is not met, a fresh QCCS  is prepared and
analyzed.  If a problem still exists, the instrument must  be recalibrated,
and all samples analyzed since the last acceptable QCCS  result must be
reanalyzed.

Step 7.  After the final 75 ug/L QCCS analysis, a natural  audit  sample
is analyzed to assure that the performance of the exchange column  remains
acceptable.

Step 8.  A 20 ug/L detection limit QCU is analyzed.

-------
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1




Section 8.0
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 1 of 2
8.0 ANALYTICAL PROCEDURES
Table 8-1 lists the procedures used by the analytical laboratories to
measure each analyte. A detailed description of these procedures is given in the
methods manuals (Kerfoot et a!., in final preparation, and Hillman et al., 1986).
Internal QC checks on the analytical procedures are discussed in Section 9.0.
TABLE 8-1. MEASUREMENTS MADE
FOR THE EASTERN LAKE
Parameter
1. Acid-neutralizing capacity (ANC)
2. Aluminum, total
3. Aluminum, total extractable
4. Ammonium, dissolved
5. Base-neutralizing capacity (BNC)
6. Calcium, dissolved
7. Carbon, dissolved inorganic (DIC)
8. Carbon, dissolved organic (DOC)
9. Chloride, dissolved
10. Chlorophyll £
Footnotes at end of table.


BY THE ANALYTICAL LABORATORIES
SURVEY - PHASE IIa
Method
Titration and Gran analysis
AASb (furnace)
Extraction with 8-hydroxyquinoline
into MIBK followed by AAS (furnace)
Automated colorimetry (phenate)
Titration and Gran analysis
AASb or ICPESb»c
Instrumental (acidification, C02
generation, infrared [IR] detection)
Instrumental (ultraviolet-promoted
oxidation, C0£ generation, IR
detection)
Ion chromatography
Extraction into methanol followed by
fluorometry and HPLCb
(continued)




-------
                                                                Section 8.0
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page  2 of 2


                            TABLE 8-1.   (Continued)

            Parameter                                  Method


11.  Conductance                          Conductivity  cell  and  meter

12.  Fluoride, total  dissolved            Ion-selective electrode  ana ,n-2ter

13.  Iron, dissolved                       AAS or  ICPESb»c

14.  Magnesium, dissolved                 AAS or  ICPESb»c

15.  Manganese, dissolved                 AAS or  ICPESb»c

16.  Nitrogen, total                       Persulfate  oxidation,  FIAb  with
                                            automated colorimetry

17.  Nitrate, dissolved                   Ion chromatography

18.  pH                                   pH electrode  and meter

19.  Phosphorus, total                     Persulfate  oxidation,  FIAb  with
                                            automated colorimetry

20.  Potassium, dissolved                 AASb

21.  Silica, dissolved                    Automated  colorimetry
                                            (molybdate  blue)

22.  Sodium, dissolved                    AASb


23.  Sulfate, dissolved                   Ion chromatography
Analytical  laboratories are those contracted to analyze either regular or
 special samples.
bAAS = atomic absorption spectroscopy;  ICPES = inductively coupled plasma
 emission spectroscopy; HPLC - high performance liquid chromatography;
 FIA = flow injection analysis.
CICPES may be used for determining calcium,  iron, magnesium,  and manganese  if
 the required detection limits can be met.   If the ICPES instrumentation is not
 able to meet the required detection limits, it may still be  used to analyze
 samples which contain the analytes at concentrations greater than 10 times the
 ICPES detection limit.  Other samples must  be analyzed by furnace or flame AAS.

-------
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 16


              9.0  ANALYTICAL LABORATORY INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL

9.1  SAMPLE RECEIPT

     All samples received by the analytical laboratory are checked in by a
receiving clerk who (1) records the date received on the shipping form,
(2) checks the samples to identify discrepancies with the shipping form,
(3) fills out the "sample condition" column of the shipping form, and (4) mails
a copy of the completed shipping form to the Sample Management Office (SMO).
The "sample condition" column should note such information as leakage in
shipping, insufficient sample volume, noticeable suspended particulates,
partially frozen samples, and the temperature inside the shipping container.
If there are any discrepancies, the processing laboratory coordinator must
be notified immediately.  These data are kept in a computer file by the SMO and
are available to interested parties.  The laboratory retains a copy of the
completed shipping form for the laboratory records.  The samples are
refrigerated as soon as possible.

     Samples are received already preserved and ready for chemical analysis.
Sample aliquots 2, 3, 4, 5, and 6 must be kept refrigerated at 4 °C and in the
dark while not in use.  When an analysis is to be performed, the analyst
removes a portion of the sample and returns the remaining sample to the
refrigerator as soon as possible.

     Even after all analyses have been completed and the results have been
checked, samples remain stored in a refrigerator at 4 °C, in case reanalysis
is necessary.

9.2  SAMPLE ANALYSIS

     Procedures given in the methods manual (Kerfoot et al., in final prepara-
tion, or Hillman et al., 1986} are to be followed exactly for each parameter
whose value must be measured.  Table 8-1 lists all required measurements and
the associated analytical methods.  Table 4-1 lists the required precision and
accuracy, expected ranges, and required detection limits for each parameter.
All  analyses for each parameter must be performed within the holding times
specified in Table 9-1.

9.3  ANALYTICAL LABORATORY DOCUMENTATION FOR QUALITY CONTROL

     The following documents and information must be updated constantly and
     must be available to the analyst and to the supervisor involved in the
     project:

     «   Laboratory standard operating procedures (SOPs) - detailed instruc-
        tions about the laboratory and instrument operations.

     »   Laboratory QA plan - clearly defined laboratory protocol  that
        specifies personnel responsibilities and the use of QC samples.

-------
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 2 of 16
               TABLE 9-1.   MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE  SAMPLE  HOLDING TIMES
                     FOR THE EASTERN LAKE SURVEY  - PHASE  II
 Holding
  Time
    7 days
  14 days
28 days
28 days(a)
Parameter
                       ANC

                       BNC
Total extract-
  able Al
Conductance


    DIC



    DOC

Chlorophyll a
                    Total  p

                      NH4+
                                                     ci-
                                                    SO
                                                       2-
                                                     Total
                                                   dissolved
                                                     Si02

                                                   Total N
                    Ca

                    Mg



                    K


                    Na



                 Total Al

                    Mn

                    Fe

       EPA (U.S. EPA,  1983)  recommends  a maximum holding  time  of 6
   months for these metals.   This study requires that all  of the metals  be
   determined within 28 days to ensure  that significant changes do  not
   occur and to obtain the data in a timely manner.
(b)Although the EPA (U.S.  EPA,  1983) recommends  that  nitrate in unpreserved
   (un-acidified) samples  be determined within 48 hours of collection,
   evidence exists (Peden, 1981; APHA et al . ,  1985) that  nitrate is stable
   for 2 to 4 weeks if stored In the dark at 4 °C.
(c)Although the EPA (U.S.  EPA,  1983) recommends  that  pH be measured immediately
   after sample collection,  evidence exists (McQuaker et  al . ,  1983) that pH  is
   stable for up to 15 days  if  stored at 4 °C  and sealed  from  the atmosphere.
   The pH is also measured in a sealed  sample  at the  processing laboratory
   within 48 hours of sample collection.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 16


     •  List of in-house samples - including projected dates for completion
        of analyses; allows analyst to schedule further analyses.

     °  Instrument performance study information - information on baseline
        noise, calibration standard response, precision as a function of
        concentration, and detection limits; used by analyst and supervisor
        to evaluate daily instrument performance.

     «  QC charts -  plots of the measured values of the analytes in the QCCS
        against the theoretical valje over time.  The purpose of the QC charts
        is to ensure that the 99 percent control limits for the measured values
        do not differ from the theoretical values by more than the limits
        given in Table 9-2.  At least once a week, the QC charts are updated
        by plotting the latest observed concentrations of the QCCS.  Then, the
        cumulative means, the 99 percei" control limits, and the 95 percent
        warning limits are calculated.  To ensure the continuity of the QC
        charts, a QCCS of the same theoretical  concentration must be used
        throughout the plotting process.  The 99 percent control limit must
        not differ from the theoretical value by more than the limits given
        in Table 9-2.   If it does, the QA manager must be consulted.  Bias for
        a given analysis is indicated if there are seven or rpore successive
        points on one side of the cumulative mean.  Current control charts
        must be available to the analyst and available during on-site
        evaluations.

     °  Data sheet QC report - report by the laboratory manager reviewing the
        QC results for each analysis and flagging for reanalysis those results
        that are outside the statistically established QC limits.

9.4  INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL WITHIN EACH METHOD

     Internal QC must be an integral part of any measurement procedure to
ensure that the results are reliable.  A summary of the internal QC procedures
for each method is given in Table 9-3.

9.4.1  Initial Calibration

     An initial calibration is performed as required for each analytical method.
Next, the linear dynamic range li-DR) is determined for the initial  calibrai.uii.
The concentrations of the calibration standards must bracket the expected
sample concentrations.  (Occasionally, the standards suggested by a method must
be adjusted to meet this requirement.)  The lowest concentration standard should
not be greater than 10 times the required detection limit.  If during the
analysis the concentration of the sample i.f outside the LDR, two options are
available.  One option is to dilute and reanalyze the sample.  In this case,
the diluent should have a matrix similar to the sample matrix with respect to
all preservatives (acid type and concentration) used.   Alternatively, two sets

-------
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 16


      TABLE 9-2.  MAXIMUM CONTROL LIMITS FOR QUALITY CONTROL CHECK SAMPLES

                                          Maximum Control  Limit for QCCS
                                          (% Difference from Theoretical
       Parameter                              Concentration of QCCS)


 Aluminum, extractable                                 ±20
 Aluminum, total                                       ±20
 Ammoni urn                                              ±10
 Calcium                                               ±5
 Carbon, dissolved inorganic (DIC)                      ±10
 Carbon, dissolved organic (DOC)                        ±10
 Chloride                                              ±5
 Chlorophyll £                                  No QCCS analyzed
 Conductance                                           ±2
 Fluoride, total dissolved                             ±5
 Iron                                                  ±10
 Magnesium                                             ±5
 Manganese                                             ±10
 Nitrate                                               ±10
 Nitrogen, total                                       ±10
 Phosphorus, total                                     ±20
 Potassium                                             ±5
 Si 1i ca                                                ±5
 Sodi urn                                                ±5
 Sulfate                                               ±5
of calibration standards may be prepared, one to encompass a range of low analyte
concentrations and one to encompass a range of higher concentrations.  Samples
are first analyzed with the assumption that the analyte concentration will be
within the LDR of the lower concentration calibration.  Each sample whose
concentration exceeds the upper end of that LDR is then reanalyzed using the
higher calibration.  The use of the higher concentration calibration must be
noted on Form 21, Dilution Factors, shown in Appendix B.  A listing of all
analytical data forms is given in Table 9-4.

9.4.2  Calibration Blank

     A calibration blank must be analyzed once per batch, immediately after the
initial  calibration, to check for baseline drift and low-level  calibration-curve
bias (y-intercept).  The instrument is rezeroed if necessary.  The calibration
blank is defined as a "0" mg/L standard and contains only the matrix of the
calibration standards.  The observed concentration of the calibration blank
must be less than or equal to twice the required detection limit.  If it is
not, the instrument must be rezeroed and the calibration must be rechecked.

-------
Section 9.0
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 5 of 16










L/\

2ȣ

UJ
0
_J
O
oc.

-^
o
(_>
L»



— ""^
Cr


<
3£
fy

t™~

•— i
u.
o

^p—
oc
IE
E
i/)


•
CO
1
"JO
j5



























«Q
C
O
u
«>c

4*

*^
+i
U
O»
L.
0












(A
4-t
J

_J
^_
o
u
+>
c
3









•5
5
o
t.
^J
I
^
+J

15
c5







C
!
L.
9
irt
«Q
4;






•
VI
4^»
c
L.
4J

Ol
M

•o
L.
IB
IB
VI
ae


*H



£4
in
V

VI
Oi
u
c
01
L,
Ol
**-
!£
^3

1
4-1
^

oe
_
•*


c
o

•5
L.
C
+* It
I/I U
AJ
*> £
c u
« VI
L. VI
4-> O
— L.
»— U

—'






z
o.


o

CD
,
U
SE
^



Ol
u
IB
la.
L,
V.
O

Ol

IB 0*
s!
i— 4-*
(•I 01
QC Ol


CM







in
p

o
44

§


N
Ol
§•

I/I

CM*
^^
U


C U
O
•59!
S§
£ Cv
•v- VI
r- Ol
U
C
01 IB
O •*•*
U VI
*> c
U k.
01 01
UJ — •

CM*


















Ol

Ol —
•0 Q.
O VI
l_
u o
Ol St£
r—

VI
Ol Ol
4-> L,
IB «- .
.0 0) 0
r- 
O 44 Cr

^ ^9 3.
0 °- 0
p o —

" , 	
'0 *
«• -i le

a. a. —

en »




0 *»
I ^
VI
«r •^•
a. ~
\f> -~ IB
O VI ~
OX ^ Ol
zS If
Q. « 03 M

r>* V
















s .
C7 Ol
•»• 4->
C IB
£ U
O t-
Ol •—
3
•O
U L.
— Ol
4-1 £
X4J
^- O
IB C
C IB
IB
Ol
C X
"- IB
ee IB


in






o

^^
•o ~-
c
IB VI

O —
z c
< 3
^M*
Z
•* ex
o
•x in
V|O
o o

ee 44

in





VI
IB
C
IB
01
m
U

la.
3

in






















m
CM
ri


c
o

u
Ol

o>
I/*)


vD








p^

rsj

•^
C
o

*J
Of
GJ

I/1)






c
1
IB
&,
•
u
01
X

O
o
Ck.

1C*



















M
^3
i.
1C
^
55
VI IB

S ^3

C •—

Ol U
i. Ol
S *"
t. c



•B
"*



O Ol

M £•


Oi C

C
u. oi
o >
k. tn
Ol
VI 3
Ol •—
Ol CM
£ i. I
1— O Oi

^.
-•


VI
7;
r—
IB •
to c c
o o e
LJ •— —
« £) —

4-> r- —
C U Ol

5


1
CNJ
•5 .a*

o u. *
+* i
• W ^3

^•~ r^
o o -

VI — Z*
e TS z
e
"•^

S
N •»-
X 4>>

« • *•>
c vi e
IB 01  C
U. 4-1 Ol £
.O IB N U
IB O — **
O> VI O. C
QC *B O IB


A £•
"* «
CM

C
"^
c **
Ol O
> CM
O> 44

5 2

"i ""'

X
C — V.
O f Ol
— v >
4^ O
u oi u
Ol — 01
4-> .0 o:

O l"~ ••

CM CM
^
VI X Ol

VI t, — C
X o>  -^ c •*"•
c— -o^ — Oj u
IB vi x on E oi
Ol 4J •— — Ol l/>
«/> •— ^ ^ ML.
O O. K Ol X 3 C
OS — 0, t- VI —
er « ^ I IB IB
VI — C 41 T3
oi e IB • oi
CO 0 C 4J
3 4-> — O £ C
CX U «-> O 4-> C7I
— L. Ol IB O -^
4-* Ol 4-» C L. VI
S> cu — —i o oi
oi o e D H. -o

JO IB* 0*
•X CM CM


IB

p- i-T • 4J 0)

r- Ol O. IB
IB i— • 4J
O «B ** IB 3 o

— - U 4> « O C O
IB Li. Z 4J O
VI L. U •
IB X « C CM - —
*> 01 0 X O Z O
01 —
z «/>

Ol C
4-> O
IB N-
C 4-> Ol
— IB je M •
E C C X VI

1 1C S C "o.
•>> IB e
•0 C £ Oi IB
C O VI OE VI
IB U Ol

4J Vi- 14- .4,
CO C 4->
— Ol O "B
E Oi U — —
01 t- 0. 3 0
Ol O L. 0 VI



A
IB





^
O.
Ol
u *«•
x x
Oi E>-

MrJ ^ft
O— 3. 01
Ol U
X U 0> C
C • IB
CM IB O *J
V 4-> V O
U 3
J< 3 J^ -0
c -o c c
IB C IB O
r- O P- U
CD U CD —

IB ^i
PO f)






VI
"vi
X
IB
C

^^
C
IB
5

CO
















Ol Ol Oi
*-• 4-1 3
IB « C
C • 0 —
— C — 4->
E 0 — C
— — Q. 0
P- VI 3 u
Ol— -0 —
•C 01 L.
C L. Ol


Ol — O
4-> C
IB «•- «
Ol O
— Ol
4"» 01 N
01 U. C—
C O C



V


_
o -»
ce v
»«
C u

O IB

I/I
— C
U —
Oi
t- C
CL Ol

Ol —
4J Ol
IB
U VI
— 4-1
'0.1
3 —
O •—

V





M
VI
X
IB
C
IB
Ol
4-*
IB
U


a.
3
o

•»'


























l/t

..K
E

f-
o
u
c
o
u

•S
V)
3
O

^.

..
u
^
u
0
O1

c
Oi
£
X
•o
Ol
>
0

o
*-
Ol
o
4-1
C
o

4->
IB
L.
Oi
Q.
O
4-*
C
i.
VI
c

o
VI
u
£
U
u
VI
IB
"^

O
X
Oi


VI
c
o
4-1
u

IB

-------
Section 9.0
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 6 of 16

































*»— -«
•o
OJ
3
C

4J
C
o
^^




ro
i



Ul

CD
cC
H*













































«Q
C
O
••—

u
•<

ft>
3*

4-1
U
Of
L.
L.
O
o













^
4-*
"E
••—
_j

^
o
k.
4-1
C
o
o








u
ft*

o
p»
o

c
o
o

X
•*-
m
3
o-









i
01
L.
3
in
IB
&











t-
o
IB
L.
IB •
Q. 01
Ol «•>
«n IB
t.
01 JO
u —
IB •—
r— IB
O. U
01 0>
u ct



ci
IB 3
01 —
— o
u u

in








s
vo


c
o

3

O
in
Oi
oe
B
in

3-
c
o
u

1^0.
4->
M
Ol
*>
c
o

**
,2
o
in
Ol
ct

in



i
«w
.- 0* ^^T .
IB - l/> << «C 01
O U. - r- Ol
4-> 1 IB •- «

• Ol O O IB
1 > Z *•> 4J • —..
_ r. — ' U Ol IB
U O • IB U. Z
— ' tn + in u
in **• *— «-> • •
in •*- x IB x « c
C XI Z 4-> Ol O Z
e o>
i— X










Ol
u

^~




1. I—
O 0
u
Ol

IB O
> •*-
4J U
O 3
IB XI
Ol 41
cc. t-

m
10




M
in
A 1

u
c
Ol

u


i*.
01
c
E
3

O
(_?
B
to


UJ 0.
u

IB

£s
Ol

u c
i- IB

«4- -^
o> z

E* *IB
"o *-• c
o— e>

*o*




»
o

oTj

« o u
4-> C
O • IB
4-> Z *-•
U
• r— S
CW IB XI
0 4-> C
•^00
to <-> o






c
o
Z c
IB O
L. —
01 *•>
O. IB
0 1.
IB
4-> OL
C O>
ft ^


i. Ol
4J r-
in Q.
C E
t- IB
tn
CJ XI
Ol C
£ IB
0

JO
•a




»•
o
44

_J

tn

O

"

^
3
in
41
tr

£










^
 O
m o
UJ UJ
o <->

IB J=
VD IO



















IB

C
i
3
t-
in
C



c 01
IB >

m 3
XI U

IB Ol
xi m
C 3
IB

in in
t.
* O
U 4^
Ol U
£ IB
O «-

IO
"-



1 *->
IB in
f— IB
Ol Ol
I. r-
i.
O 4->
U IB
•*- 41
0 JO

4-> XI
c •—
01 3
— O
U JC
•^ in
i*. •
»*- C Oi
Ol O O*
o *^ *
O 4-> O

IB
^4




c
o
5
IB
i.
C ••-
O i-
"- « X
4-< U 4J
IB ^>
JO «*- «
;= is
IB 01 —
0 >• t-

r-4 IB
«•*






•Bl

^
^

Q.
O

O
r—

O



















ft*
4->
IB
U

^
IB
U
0>


J3
•«l



L.
X> O
*3 4J
o c
£ Oi
in u
t.
L. Ol
4^
U O


IB
4-* S"
IB U
c a.

"E

r— c
Oi O •
••- C
XI 4J O
C « ~-
IB C 4J
•^ 3
Oi E —
C IB O


t. O J<
01 u c
4-" 1C
Ol »- t—
O O JO


rJ











t
o

v|

C
IB

m


(SI






OT
^B
in
^
IB
C
«e

^
IS
m


CM





































Ol

IB
k-


n
u
Ol
BC


r*>



O
i-4
v|
Oi
U
c
Oi
i.
41
I*.

Q

Ol

4-*
IB

01


t
n


Ol Ol C Ol
4-> c m *J
IB O IB
U -CO
•^ *J O •»•
r— -r- 4-> ^>
o.— 10 a.
3 Q.J= 3
O tn X>
i.
x i 01 c
L Q.—
O m
4J »^- 4-» Ol
IB m U M
O t- I. i—
JD IB 4-> IB
IB C X C
_J < Ol IB


PI

































f
in
4J


_
^,


o
L.
C
O
u

Oi
•*-
4/1
3
o

•p—
J£
U

f
U
o-

c

JC
2


2

f_
^_
o
**•
ft*
o
c
o
«J
IK

o.
o
4-*
c
i
3
L.

in
^
O

in
•JJ
£
U
U
in
IB
^
XI
g
X

•°
in
C
o


u

IB


-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 7 of 16
9.4.3  Quality Control Check Sample
      Immediately after standardization of the instruments, a QCCS containing
the analyte of interest at a concentration in the middle of the calibration
range must be analyzed.  The QCCS may be obtained commercially or it may be
prepared by the analyst from a source that is independent of the calibration
standards (i.e., the QCCS cannot be made by diluting the same stock solution
used to make the calibration standards).  The QCCS must be analyzed (and its
measured concentration calcj'aied to verify the calibration curve) prior to
sample analysis, after every 10 samples, and after the last sample analysis.
The observed value for the QCCS must not differ from the theoretical value by
more than the limits given in Table 9-2.  When an unacceptable value for the
QCCS is obtained, the instrument must be recalibrated and all samples that were
analyzed after the last acceptable QCCS must be reanalyzed.  The observed
concentrations for the QCCS must be plotted on a QC chart as described in
Section 9.3.  If bias is indicated (see Section 9.3) analysis must be stopped
and an explanation must be sought.

9.4.4  Detection Limit Quality Control  Check Sample

     The detection limit (DL) QCCS is a low-level concentration QCCS containing
the analyte of interest at a concentration two to three times the required
detection limit.  This QCCS must be analyzed once per batch for extractable Al,
total Al, dissolved metals (Ca, Fe, K,  Mg, Mn, Na), total P, and total N.  The
results are reported on Form 20, Blanks and QCCS Results (see Appendix B).  The
measured value of the analyte in the DL QCCS must be within 20 percent of the
theoretical  concentration.  If it is not, the problem must be identified and
corrected, and an acceptable result mus* be obtained prior to sample analysis.
The purpose of analyzing the DL QCCS is to eliminate the necessity of formally
determining the detection limit on a daily basis.

9.4.5  Reagent Blank

     For methods requiring sample preparation (dissolved Si02, total N, total P,
and total Al), a reagent blank must be  prepared and analyzed for each batch of
samples.  A reagent blank is defined as a sample composed of all the reagents
(in the same quantities) used in preparing an actual lake sample for analysis.
The reagent blank also is carried through the same digestion and extraction
procedure as an actual  sample.   The concentration of the reagent blank must be
less than or equal  to twice the required detection limit.  If the concentration
exceeds this limit, the source of contamination must be investigated and elimi-
nated.  A new reagent blank must then be prepared and analyzed for any sample
in which the high concentration reagent blank value contributed significantly
(more than 10 percent)  to the value of  the analyte in question.  If a high
reagent blank problem cannot be corrected, then the QA manager must be contacted,
Reagent blank results are reported on Form 20 but are not subtracted from the
sample results.

-------
          TABLE 9-4.  DATA FORMS USED BY THE ANAL

     Data Form
                                               I
                                               I
                                               I
                                               I
I
        11                          Summary of m
        llA(b)

        13                          ANC and BNO|

        14
-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 9.U
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 9 of 16

precision levels given in Table 4-1.  The control limits should not exceed
these  values.   If they do, the QA manager must be notified immediately.  If the
duplicate values fall outside the control limits, an explanation must be sought
(such  as instrument malfunction or calibration drift).  A second, different
sample must then be analyzed in duplicate.  No further samples may be analyzed
until  the duplicate sample results are within the control limits, unless
approval is given by the QA manager.  The percent relative standard deviation
(SRSD) is calculated as described below:

                                         s
                               ZRSD  =  	 x 100
                                         y
                                         n - 1
     where:  s is the standard deviation
             X is an observed value
             Y is the mean of the data (observed values)
             n is the population of the routine (or other sample)/duplicate
               pair (n - 2)

9.4.7  Ion Chromatography Resolution Test

     An ion chromatography (1C) resolution test must be performed once per
analytical run (day) by analyzing a standard containing approximately 1 mg/L
each of sulfate and nitrate.  If the resolution does not excee-1 60 percent, the
column should be replaced and the resolution test should be repeated.

9.4.8  Column Efficiency Test

     A column efficiency test must be performed once per day on the reduction
column of the flow-injection analyzer.  A column efficiency (CE) standard is
analyzed; if the result indicates that the column is less than 95 percent
efficient, the column must be reactivated or replaced and the test must be
repeated.  After the requirement of 95 percent efficiency is met, a CE QCCS is
analyzed; the measured concentration must be within 10 percent of the actual
concentration.

9.4.9 Continuing Sample Analysis

     The remaining samples are analyzed if the reagent blank, the analytical
laboratory duplicate, and the QCCS are within the control limits.  After every
10 (or fewer) samples and after the last sample, a QCCS must be analyzed to
continually verify the calibration curve.  If the measured value differs from
the theoretical  value by more than the limits given in Table 9-2, the
instrument is recalibrated and the previous 10 samples are reanalyzed.

-------
                                                               Section 9.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 10 of 16
9.5  OVERALL INTERNAL QUALITY CONTROL
     Once the value of each sample is determined,  several  procedures are
followed to check the correctness  of  analyses:

9.5.1  Anion-Cation Balance

     Theoretically, the ANC of a sample equals  the alkalinity,  or  the difference,
(expressed as ueq/L), between the  concentration of cations and  the concentration
of anions in a sample (Kramer, 1982).  In  practice,  this is rarely the case;
deviations are caused by analytical  variability and  the presence of ions
(protolytes) that are not measured (e.g.,  organic  ions).   The concentrations of
these unmeasured ions can be significant in natural  lake water  samples.   The
percent ion balance difference (SIBD) calculation  below utilizes the ANC  value
to take these ions into account; as a result,  the  calculation is more accurate.
For each sample, the percent ion balance difference  is calculated  as follows:

                            ANC +  I anions - I  cations
                   %IBD  =  	 x 100
                                       TI

       where:

             I anions  =  [CT] +  [F~] + [N03~] +  [S042"J

             I cations  =  [Na+] + [K+] +  [Ca2+] + [Mg2"*"]  +  [NH4+]

             TI  =  total ionic strength  = ANC + Z anions * £ cations + 2[H+]

             ANC * Alkalinity

             [H+]  =  (10-PH) x 106 ueq/L

     All concentrations are expressed as microequivalents  per liter.  A list of
factors for converting the concentration of each analyte  from mg/L to ueq/L
is given in Table 9-5.

     If the ion balance for a sample does  not  meet the criteria given in
Table 9-6, the data should be examined for possible  causes of an ion balance
that falls outside the criteria.  This check may indicate  which analytical
results give rise to the unusual ion balance and,  hence, the parameters for
which the sample should be reanalyzed.  Alternatively,  it  may be  found that
reanalysis is unnecessary; for example, if the  percent ion difference is  nega-
tive and the DOC is greater than 3 mg/L, unmeasured organic anions are probably
responsible, not analytical error.  The QA manager must be contacted when
questions arise regarding reanalysis.

-------
1
1




1
•
1



1

1
1



1
•
I
•
1

1
•

1
•
1
iHr



1
1







TABLE 9-5. FACTORS
Ion Factor
Ca2+ 49.9

CT 28.2
Mg2+ 82.3
N03" 16.1
r 52.6



Section 9.0
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 11 of 16

TO CONVERT mg/L TO ueq/L
~SSSSSSS«SSS«SSS — SS£ZSSESSSSSSSSSwv««SvSZ«
Ion Factor
NH/1" 55.4
4
K+ 25.6
Na+ 43.5
S042' 20.8


TABLE 9-6. CHEMICAL REANALYSIS CRITERIA

A. Anion-Cation Balance
Total Ionic Strength (ueq/L)
<50
>50 <100
7100
B. Conductance
Measured Conductance (uS/cm)
<5
>5 <30
^30

alf the absolute value of the percent


Maximum % Ion Balance Difference3
60
30
15

Maximum % Conductance Differencea
50
30
20

difference exceeds these values, the
sample is reanalyzed. When reanalysis is indicated, the data for each
parameter is examined for possible analytical error. Suspect results are then
redetermined and the above percent di
fferences are recalculated (Peden, 1981).
If the percent differences for reanalyzed samples are still unacceptable, or
if no suspect data are identified, the QA manager must be contacted for
guidance.






-------
                                                               Section 9.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  12 of 16
9.5.2  Conductance Balance
     An approximation of the conductance  of a  sample  can  be  calculated by
adding together the equivalent conductance for each measured ion  at  infinite
dilution.   The calculated conductance is  determined by  multiplying the concen-
tration of each ion by the appropriate factor  given in  Table 9-7.  The percent
conductance difference (%CD) is calculated as  follows:

                         calculated cond.  - measured  cond.
                % CD  =  	 x 100
                                measured  conductance


     Any sample which has a %CD that exceeds the limit  listed in  Table 9-5 -'s
reanalyzed.  As with the calculation of percent ion balance  difference,  an
unacceptable value for ZCD indicates either the presence  of  unmeasured ions
in the sample or an analytical error in the measurement.   For the surface
waters sampled during ELS-II, the ions included in the  calculation of 2CD
are expected to account for 90 to 100 percent  of the  ions in a sample.
However, in contrast to the calculation of percent ion  balance difference,
there is no term in the %CD calculation to account for  protolytes that are
not specifically determined.  The QA manager must be  contacted when  questions
arise regarding why a JCD is outside the  criteria and whether reanalysis is
needed.

9.6  INSTRUMENTAL DETECTION LIMITS

     Instrumental detection limits (IDLs) must be determined and  ; eported
weekly for each parameter except chlorophyll £, pH,  conductance,  initial DIC,
ANC, and BNC.  The IDL for chlorophyll a_ must be checked  daily,  ror this
study, the reported instrumental detection limit is defined  as three times the
standard deviation of 10 nonconsecutive replicate reagent blank or calibration
blank analyses.  Calibration blanks are analyzed when a method does  not  require
a reagent blank (see Hillman et al., 1986; Kerfoot et al.,  in final  preparation]
In some determinations such as those using ion chromatography and automated
analysis, a signal may or may not be obtained for a blank analysis.   If  a
signal is not obtained for the analysis of a blank sample,  the instrumental
detection limit is defined as three times the standard deviation  of 10 noncon-
secutive replicate analyses of a standard whose concentration is  two to  three
times the required detection  limit.  Reported detection limits must not exceed
the required detection limits listed in Table 4-1.

9.7  DATA REPORTING

Results from each analysis are recorded on the appropriate data forms (listed
in Table 9-4 and shown in Appendix B).  For each sample,  the analytical
results for aliquots  1 through 7 are reported on Form  11, Summary of Sample

-------
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 13 of 16
 TABLE 9-7.   FACTORS FOR DETERMINING THE CONDUCTANCE OF IONS (uS/cm at 25 °C)a
Ion
Ca2+
cr
H+
OH"


HC03"

cos2-
Factor
per mg/L
2.60
2.14
3.5 x 105 (per mole/L)
1.92 x 105
(per mole/L)

0.715

2.82
Ion
Mg2+
Na+
NH4+
S042"

NOo"

K+

Factor
per mg/L
3.82
2.13
4.13
1.54

1.15

1.84

aTaken from American Public Health Association et al. (1985) and Weast (1972).
 Ion concentration is multiplied by the listed factor to obtain the conductance
 value.  The concentrations of the ions that are not measured directly are
 calculated by means of the following equations:
     where:
pH = initial  pH measured before BNC titration.  (Brackets
     represent molar concentrations,)
                          K
               COH-]
                           w
     where:  KW  =  1 x 10~13-8 moles/L


                               5.080 (mg DIC/L) [H+]
              HCO," (mg/L)  =	
                                ru+~]<: + ["u"1""] |(  +1/1
  2-
     (mg/L)
                               4.996 (mg DIC/L) KjK2

                               [H+]2 + [H+DK  + KK
     where:   KX  =  4.4463 x 10~7 moles/L K£ = 4.6881 x 10"11 moles/L

-------
                                                                Section  9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 14  of  16


Results, to the number of decimal  places listed in Table 9-8.   EMSL-LV
analytical results for iron and manganese in anoxics study samples and  for
total N and total P are reported on Form lla.   Results are annotated by  the
data qualifiers (tags) listed in Table 9-9, where applicable.   After a  form is
completed, the analytical laboratory supervisor must sign it,  indicating that
he or she has reviewed the data and that the samples were analyzed exactly  as
described in the methods manual (Hillman et al., 1986; Kerfoot et  al.,  in final
preparation).  All deviations from the methods manual require  the  authorization
of the QA manager prior to sample analysis.

     Copies of raw data must be submitted as requested by the  QA manager.  All
original raw data must be retained by the laboratory until notified otherwise
by the QA manager.  Raw data include data system printouts, chromatograms,
notebooks, QC charts, standard preparation data, and all  other information
pertinent to sample analysis.

9.8  DAILY EVALUATION OF QUALITY CONTROL DATA

     During periods when survey samples are being analyzed, each laboratory
is required to make a verbal, written, or electronically transmitted status
report daily to the EMSL-LV QA staff.  Usually a member of the QA  staff
telephones the laboratories to obtain the status report.   The  objective  of
these reports is to keep the QA staff informed of the status of the internal
and external QC checks in the laboratory in order to identify  and  solve  any
problems that may arise.  The reports also allow the QA staff  to obtain
preliminary results for the blanks, duplicates, and laboratory and field
audit samples that are double-blind to the laboratories.  (A discussion  of
blind and double-blind samples is presented in Section 10.) Without this
sample status report, these data would not be available for evaluation  until
the data packages were submitted by the laboratories, which may be as long
as 35 days after the samples are received.  During the daily telephone
contact, the QA staff member records all communications in a bound notebook
in order to track and resolve all  problems encountered during  the  analytical
laboratory operations.

     Each week, the QC charts are updated and new control and  warning limits
are determined.  The QA chemist at the analytical laboratory then  performs  a
QC audit in which all the data are reviewed.  Any values that  lie  outside the
control or warning limits are checked to verify that they are  not  the result of
a transcription error.  If bias is indicated (seven successive points on one
side of the cumulative mean), analyses are stopped and an explanation is sought.
Copies of the plots are given to the analytical laboratory supervisor,  the  QA
chemist, and each analyst.

-------
                                                                Section 9.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 15 of 16


                TABLE 9-8.  DECIMAL PLACE REPORTING REQUIREMENTS

                                           Required Number of Decimal Places
                                                  in Reported Results
                                       Spring Seasonal and    Summer and Fall
            Parameter                  Variability Surveys    Seasonal Surveys3


Acid-neutralizing capacity                        1                      1
Aluminum, extractable                             3                      4
Aluminum, total                                   3                      4
Ammoni urn                                          23

Base-neutralizing capacity                        1                      1

Calcium                                           2                      3
Carbon, dissolved inorganic (DIC)                 2                      3
Carbon, dissolved organic (DOC)                   1                      2
Chloride                                          2                      3
Chlorophyll £                                    --2
Conductance                                       1                      1

Fluoride, total dissolved                         3                      4

Iron                                              2                      3

Magnesium                                         2                      3
Manganese                                         2                      3

Nitrate                                           3                      4
Nitrogen, total                                  —                      3

pH                                                22
Phosphorus, total                                 3                      4
Potassium                                         2                      3

Silica                                            2                      3
Sodi urn                                            23

Sulfate                                           2                      3


aOn the data screens that are used to enter the summer and fall analytical
 data, all results appear with four decimal places.  However, results are
 significant only to the number of decimal places given in this table.

-------
                                                               Section 9.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 16 of 16


         TABLE 9-9.   NATIONAL  SURFACE  WATER  SURVEY  LABORATORY AND FIELD
                            DATA QUALIFIERS (TAGS)


Qualifier                               Indicates


   A            Instrument unstable
   B            Redone,  first  reading  not  acceptable
   C            Instruments, sampling  gear not  vertical  in water column
   D            Slow stabilization
   E            Sample destroyed  during  shipment
   F            Result outside QA criteria (with consent of QA manager)

   G            Atypical  result;  already reanalyzed and  confirmed by the
                  laboratory manager
   H            Holding  time exceeded  criteria  (Form  19  only)
   J            Result not available;  insufficient  sample volume shipped
                  to laboratory from the field

   K            Result not available;  entire aliquot  not shipped
   L            Not  analyzed as a result of  interference
   M            Result not available;  sample lost or  destroyed by laboratory

   N            Not  required
   P            Result outside QA criteria,  but insufficient volume for
                  reanalysis
   Q            Result outside QA criteria

   R            Result from reanalysis
   S            Contamination  suspected
   T            Leaking  container
   U            Result not required by procedure; unnecessary

   V            Anion-cation balance  (ilBD)  outside criteria as a result of
                  high DOC
   W            Percent  difference (%D)  calculation (Form 14) outside  criteria
                  as a result  of  high  DOC
   X            Available for  miscellaneous  comments  in  the field only

   Y            Available for  miscellaneous  comments  in  the field only
   Z            Available for  miscellaneous  comments  in  the field only

-------
                                                                Section 10.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 6
                      10.0  PERFORMANCE AND SYSTEM AUDITS
10.1  PERFORMANCE AUDIT SAMPLES

     Audit  samples are samples of known concentration that are incorporated
into the batches of routine samples.  Analyzing audit samples and comparing
the results to the known values allows an assessment to be made of the quality
of the survey data.  Both natural audit samples (quantities of lake water tnat
have been filtered, preserved, and extensively analyzed to determine the
chemical properties) and synthetic audit samples (laboratory preparations that
have predetermined compositions similar to lake water compositions) are used as
part of the QA activities of ELS-II.  Chlorophyll a^ audit samples come from a
different source and are discussed in Section 10.1.2.  The audit samples are
shipped to the analytical laboratories from the processing laboratory as though
they were routine lake samples.  Every attempt is made to assure that the audit
samples are double-blind to the analytical laboratory; i.e., tnat the laboratory
neither recognizes them as audit samples nor knows their compositions.

10.1.1  Field Audit Samples

     The purpose of including field audit samples is to identify sources of
error affecting data quality that may occur during sample processing, shipment,
or analysis.  These problems could include sample contamination, sample degrada-
tion, solvent evaporation, and improper or inaccurate sample analysis.  When
used in conjunction with the laboratory audit samples, the analysis of these
samples provides data that can be used to distinguish processing laboratory
problems from analytical laboratory problems.  There are two types of field
audit samples:  field synthetic audit samples and field natural audit
samples.

     The field synthetic audit samples are prepared at a central facility
(a contract laboratory independent from those that analyze the ELS-II field
samples) and are sent in 2-L portions to the processing laboratory; there, they
are processed through all the filtration and preservation steps and are labeled
as though they were routine lake samples.  Thus, the field synthetic audit
samples are single-blind to the processing laboratory (i.e., recognized as
audit samples but of unknown composition) and are double-olind to the analytical
laboratory.

     During the spring and summer activities, the synthetic samples are used
to test the sampling and analysis systems at low concentrations of analytes;
no field synthetic audit samples are scheduled for the fall survey.  The
theoretical compositions of the field (and laboratory) synthetic audit samples
are shown in Table 10-1.  The compositions of the synthetic audit samples were
based on the expected compositions of lake-water samples.

-------
                                                                        Section  10.0
                                                                        Revision 2
                                                                        Date:   11/B7
                                                                        Page 2  of 6
TABLE 10-1.   THEORETICAL  COMPOSITION  OF FIELD AND  LABORATORY SYNTHETIC AUDIT
                 SAMPLES  FOR THE  EASTERN LAKE SURVEY - PHASE IIa
Field and
Laboratory
Synthetic
Audits:
Spring and

Parameter
Acid-neutralizing
capacity^
Aluminum,
extractable
Aluminum, total
Ammonium
Base-neutralizing
capacity6
Calcium
Carbon, dissolved
Inorganic (DIG)
Carbon, dissolved
organic (DOC)
Chloride
Conductance
Fluoride, total
dissolved
Iron
Magnesium
Manganese
Nitrate
pHb
Phosphorus, total
Potassium
Silica
Sodium
Sulfate
Summer
Surveys

—


0.020


...
0.19

0.96

1.0
0.34
...

0.042
0.06
0.45
0.10
0.467
— , __

0.203
1.07
2.75
2.28

LSI

-39.0

0.0100
0.0200
0.04

49.9
0.030

0.120

0.40
25.000
17.0

0.0300
0.090
0.500
0.300
0.6000
4.40
0.0100
0.250
1.500
0.800
0.100
Laboratory Synthetic Audits

LS2

400.0

0.0150
0.0300
0.07

7.70
4.500

4.920

2.50
1.500
96.4

0.3000
0.040
0.020
0.060
0.1500
7.94
0.0200
1.500
0.100
10.000
6.000

LS3

140.0

0.0250
0.0500
0.10

10.00
9.000

1.800

3.50
0.800
45.5

0.0500
0.600
2.500
0.040
1.0000
7.49
0.0450
0.350
3.000
0.030
4.000

LS4

70.0

0.0080
0.1200
0.15

10.0
2.500

0.960

5.00
5.000
32.4

0.0050
0.060
0.800
0.020
0.3000
7.19
0.0900
0.020
0.700
3.500
15.000
: Fall Survey

LS5

15.0

0.0400
0.7500
0.50

10.4
7.000

0.310

10.00
0.400
1.4

0.0600
0.020
0.010
0.010
0.0200
6.53
0.2000
0.600
7.000
1.500
5.000

RWL RWM

	 	


	 	
... ...

50 248
0.014 0.049

	 	

... ...
...
26 130

0.054 0.098
—
0.024 0.051
..— — *—
0.501 7.06
4.30 3.59
	 	
0.052 0.106
	 	
0.205 0.419
2.69 10.8

Units

ueq/L

ng/L
ng/L
ng/L

ueq/L
mg/L

mg/L

ng/L
mg/L
uS/cm

mg/L
ng/L
ng/L
ng/L
ng/L
pH
mg/L
mg/L
ng/L
ng/L
mg/L
 •Values are reported to the number of decimal places  specified in Table 9-8, except for the
  NBS simulated rainwater audits (RWL and RWH) for which the  certified values are given.
 °These parameters are related and affect the analytical results of one another.

-------
                                                                Section 10.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 6


     The field natural audit samples are prepared from water collected from
Big Moose Lake and Seventh Lake in the Adirondack Mountains of New York.  Big
Moose Lake is acidic and is susceptible to decreases in pH due to acidic
deposition; Seventh Lake has ANC values in the moderate range.  These lake
waters are passed through a 0.45-um filter at the audit sample preparation
laboratory and are stored there at 4 °C to minimize changes in their chemical
compositions.  The natural audit samples are 2-L portions of these waters.
For field natural audit samples, the 2-L portions are sent to the processing
laboratory, where they are incorporated into the sample batches and are
processed in the same manner as routine samples.

     The numbers of field synthetic and natural audit samples used for the
ELS-II surveys are given in Table 10-2.

10.1.2  Laboratory Audit Samples

     The purpose of using laboratory audit samples is to help verify the
accuracy of analytical procedures and to assure that the laboratory is main-
taining the capability to properly analyze the samples.

     The laboratory natural audit samples (obtained from the same filtered
and preserved bulk lake water supply as the field natural audit samples)
are split into aliquots at the audit sample preparation laboratory and the
sets of aliquots are sent to the processing laboratory; at the processing
laboratory, the aliquots are relabeled and are incorporated into the sample
batches.

     The laboratory synthetic audit samples are usually sent to the process-
ing laboratory from the audit sample preparation laboratory, already split
into aliquots.  An exception to this practice is the handling of NBS
simulated rainwater audit samples (see Section 6.2.2); these samples are not
apportioned into aliquots.  Because only small volumes of sample are available
and only some analytes of interest are present, many of the standard analyses
are not required on the simulated rainwater audit samples.  The NBS samples
are only single-blind to the analytical laboratory, because they are readily
distinguishable from the other samples.  All the audit samples are labeled by
the processing laboratory personnel, are included in a batch with routine lake
samples processed on the same day, and are shipped to the analytical laboratory
for analysis.  The theoretical  compositions of the laboratory synthetic audit
samples are given in Table 10-1.

     The laboratory chlorophyll ji audit samples are filters through which
aliquots of an algae culture have been passed.  They are not treated in any way
by the processing laboratory.  The audit samples are analyzed by the contractor
laboratory that analyzes the routine samples and by a referee laboratory as a
check on the stability of the audit samples.  These are the only audit samples
used in conjunction with the chlorophyll £ samples.

-------
                                                               Section 10.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 4 of 6
   TABLE 10-2.   AUDIT SAMPLE SCHEDULE  FOR  THE  EASTERN LAKE  SURVEY - PHASE  II*

Audit
Sample Type
Field Natural
Field Synthetic
Lab Natural
Lab Synthetic
Total

Spring
Variability
13
5
5
3
26
Survey
Spring
Seasonal
21
8
11
3
43

Summer
Seasonal
19
7
34
4
64

Fall
Seasonal
34
0
12
45b
91

Total
87
20
62
55
224
aNumbers given are the numbers of samples of each audit type  analyzed  during
 the course of the survey.
bSix or seven of each of the five formulations  prepared by the  audit sample
 preparation laboratory and six of each of the  two simulated  rainwater formula-
 tions obtained from NBS.
     The numbers of laboratory synthetic and natural  audit samples  used for
the ELS-II surveys are given in Table 10-2.

10.1.3  Applications of Audit Sample Data

     Data are obtained from the analyses of the audit samples for the following
purposes:

     •  To judge the performance of the processing laboratory in the processing
        and shipment of samples.

     •  To judge the ongoing capability of the analytical  laboratories to
        properly analyze the samples.

     •  To establish a statistically valid estimate of the overall  bias and
        precision of the chemical analyses.

     Acceptance windows are established for the measurement of each analyte
in the audit samples.  The size of the windows is based upon the information
available for each analytical method at the time the study is initiated.  If

-------
                                                                Section 10.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 5 of 6


the analytical results for a measurement fall  outside the acceptance window,
the EMSL-LV QA staff reviews the data to determine the cause of the problem
and immediately contacts the processing laboratory or the analytical labora-
tory, whichever is appropriate, to seek corrective action.  Data for the
routine samples in the affected batch are checked to determine if they were
also affected by the problem.  If the routine samples were affected, re-
analysis of the samples in question is requested.  The establishment of the
acceptance windows for audit samples is described in Section 11.0.

     A statistical evaluation of the audit sample data will  provide an
estimate of the accuracy (bias) and precision of the analytical methods for
each of the required measurements; the laboratory bias study conducted during
the summer survey will provide supplemental information.  Any changes over time
in the analytical  results for the natural field and laboratory audit samples
without corresponding changes in the data for the synthetic audit samples may
be attributed to analyte instability.

10.2  QUALITY ASSURANCE SYSTEM AUDITS (ON-SITE EVALUATIONS)

     The system audit is a qualitative evaluation of tne field, processing
laboratory, and analytical laboratory facilities, equipment, and operations
such as record keeping, data reporting, and QC procedures.

10.2.1  Field Operations and Processing Laboratory On-Site Evaluation

     The EPA project officer and auditors from the EMSL-LV QA staff conduct
at least one on-site evaluation of the field and processing laboratory
operations during the course of the ELS-II sampling effort.   The on-site
evaluation is conducted as soon as possible after the start of survey
operations.  The questionnaire given in Appendix C is used to assist in the
evaluation.

     The in-depth review of field operations includes interviews with the
field base coordinator and the members of each sampling crew.  The QA auditor
accompanies one or more of the sampling crews on a sampling excursion.  If any
problems are observed, the auditor brings them to the attention of the field
base coordinator.   At the conclusion of the audit visit, a meeting is held with
the field personnel  to discuss the findings of the audit.

     At the processing laboratory, the QA auditor interviews the analysts
and evaluates the  equipment, cleanliness, record-keeping, analytical and
sample-handling procedures, and implementation of QC protocols.  Any problems
that are identified  are brought to the attention of the laboratory supervisor
and the laboratory coordinator at the meeting following the audit.

10.2.2  Analytical Laboratory On-Site Evaluation

     Each analytical laboratory participating in ELS-II can expect a minimum
of two in-depth, on-site evaluations conducted by the EPA QA manager or an

-------
                                                                Section 10.0
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 6


authorized representative.   The  questionnaire  in  Appendix  D  is  used to assist
in the on-site analytical  laboratory evaluation.

     The first on-site laboratory evaluation  is performed  after the laboratory
has successfully analyzed  a set  of preaward performance  evaluation  (PE) samples
for the contract-required  parameters and  before the  actual survey analytical
work begins.  The PE samples contain some or  all  of  the  analytes for which
determination is required,  in the expected concentration ranges.  The PE
sample results are scored  in accordance with  the  ELS-II  preaward audit sample
scoring sheet given in Appendix  E.  Grading emphasizes analytical accuracy,  but
a substantial portion of the grade depends on  meeting the  requirements for
internal QC, data reporting, and delivery deadlines.  The  QA auditor summarizes
all observations from the  on-site evaluation  in  a summary  report and brings  all
problems that are observed  to the attention of the laboratory manager for
corrective action.

     The second on-site laboratory evaluation  is  conducted after approximately
one-third of the ELS-II analyses have been completed. During the second  on-
site evaluation, outstanding issues pertaining to the QA sample (audit,  field
duplicate, and field blank) data and the QC sample (QCCS,  laboratory duplicate,
and calibration blank) data received to date  are  discussed.   The laboratory
questionnaire is updated,  if necessary, noting all changes since the first
on-site evaluation.  A summary report is written  for this  and for each additional
on-site laboratory evaluation.

-------
                                                                Section  11.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 3
                           11.0  ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA
11.1  ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR AUDIT SAMPLES

     Acceptance windows for single values from audit samples are based on the
audit data from the NSWS stream survey, the ELS-II  spring  variability  study,
and the ELS-II spring seasonal survey.  The data for the synthetic audit samples,
which (except for the fall audit samples) all  have  the same theoretical  concen-
tration, are checked for variability and then  are pocled to provide the largest
possible number of observations.  Data for each type of natural  audit  are
evaluated independently.  The objective of creating windows is to predict
intervals for acceptable single future values  based on <=. :ample  mean ("X) and
sample standard deviation (s) computed from n  previously observed values.  The
limits of each window are determined by using  a t-statistic (t).
                                    is a Student's t
where:
      Z is the standard normal variate,  having a normal  distribution with a mean
        of 0 and a variance of 1

      U is a variable with a chi-square  distribution with r degrees of freedom,
        and Z and U are independent
     The observed values Xj, X£, X3	Xn are independent and have a normal
distribution (~N) with a population mean (u) and variance(  2).   A prediction
interval of (1 - a) or a single future value, y, is needed.   Let 7 = sample
mean and s = sample standard deviation.   It is known that
                        y - N(u,  o2) and I ~ N  u
            .(4)
Therefore,
                          y - T~ N
0,

-------
                                  y- x
                                                                Section  11.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 2 of 3
                                               X2
                                                 (n-l)
                           r  =  n-1.
Substituting,
                           t  =
                                    (n-l)S2

                                    (n-l)o2
     The upper and lower limits  of  each  window can  be  formalized  as follows:
                                 1
                IT + (t) (s)  >Ji + -  =  upper  limit of  the  window
                                 n
                X - (t)(s)
+ -  =  lower limit of the window
  n
     The Student's t-value (t)  has n-1  degrees of freedom.   The  t-value  is  for
a 2-tailed test with a cumulative  probability  of  0.95  (i.e.,  2.5 percent
probability on either side).

     Grubbs1  test (Grubbs, 1969)  is applied to the data  before interval  estima-
tion to detect outliers.   The  outliers  are  excluded from the  computation of the
windows.

11.2  ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR  DUPLICATE MEASUREMENTS

     The same assumption  of a  normal  data distribution made  when audit windows
are set also is made when the  acceptance criteria are  determined for the
precision of routine/duplicate measurements.   In  addition,  it is assumed
that o is proportional to the  theoretical concentration  (u)  of the analyte.

-------
                                                                Section 11.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 3
Therefore, the routine value minus the duplicate value (R-D)  is a normal
distribution with a mean of 0 and a variance of
     To identify a value difference in the routine/duplicate pair beyond
which analytical results may be questionable, the following equation
is applied.
                                           Ic (R+D)
                             |R-D| > 1.96


where


     k is an estimate of -
                         M

If the statement is true for a given routine/duplicate pair,  the results for that
pair exceed the crieria and may be questionable.


11.3  ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA FOR BLANK SAMPLES

     The acceptance criteria for blank samples are  based on  data from ELS-I
and WLS-I.  The 95th percentile (p95)  of the blank  data is set as the upper
limit of acceptable blank values, and  the lower acceptable limit is  the
negative of the contract-required detection limit (CRDL).  When the  p95  is less
than the CRDL, the upper limit is the  CRDL.  For BNC,  the criterion  for  the
upper limit is based on the p95 of data from WLS-I  only.


11.4  CORRECTIVE ACTION

     Laboratories which fail to meet the acceptance criteria for analysis of
audit samples or duplicates are required to repeat  the analysis that produced
the erroneous results.  If results from the second  analysis  are still unaccept-
able, further investigation is initiated and the  data  are qualified.

-------
                                                                Section  12.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  1  of 8
                          12.0  DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
     The purpose of the data base management system (DBMS)  is  to  assemble,
store, and edit data generated during ELS-II and other NSWS surveys.   The DBMS
is also used to provide basic reports of the survey results, to perform  certain
statistical analyses, and to provide data security.  The  relationship  of data
base management to the overall ELS-II is shown in Figure  12-1.

     The data are stored in four major data sets:  Data Set 1  - the raw  data
set, Data Set 2 - the verified data set, Data Set 3 - the validated data set,
and Data Set 4 - the enhanced data set.   These four data  sets  make up  the data
base and are discussed below.  All data sets are protected from unauthorized or
accidental  access by individual, system, and file passwords.

12.1  DATA SET 1 - THE RAW DATA SET

      The raw data consist of the field data, which are reported  on the  lake
data and batch forms, and the data from the analytical  laboratories, which  are
reported on data forms 11, 11A, 13, 18,  18A, 19, 19A, 20, 20A, 21, 22, 22A,
and 23 (see Appendix B).  (Analytical data from Form 26,  Data  Confirmation/
Reanalysis Request, are used only by the QA staff and are not  entered  in the
raw data set.)  The data include all analytical results and data  qualifiers
(given in Tables 9-9 and 12-1).  For the spring variability and spring seasonal
surveys, operators at Systems Applications Inc. (SAI), the data base manager,
enter these data into the raw data set using the Statistical Analysis  System
(SAS).  For the summer and fall surveys, data are provided by  the analytical
laboratories on floppy disks, and only the field data must be  entered  manually.

     The SAS full-screen editor procedure is used to provide gross error check-
ing as data are entered.  All data that must be entered manually  are entered
into two separate data sets by two different operators.  For the  NSWS  data
base, a custom program (COMPARE) has been developed in SAS to  compare  the two
data sets and identify any inconsistencies in numeric and alphabetic variables.
The advantages of this double entry and comparison process is  that entry errors
are identified and are removed from the system.

     The field personnel and the analytical laboratories  also  send copies of,
respectively, the field forms and data packages to the EMSL-LV QA staff  for
concurrent data analysis.  Thus, receipt of the field and analytical data forms
(and floppy disks, when applicable) by the QA staff verifies that all  forms and
disks have been received by the data base management personnel.

     Changes must be made in the field data if errors are identified through
the daily QA contact with the field personnel.  If the data in question  have
not been entered yet by SAI, the changes are included in  the raw  data  set.   If
the data have been entered already, the changes are included in subsequent  data
sets.

-------
                                                                Section 14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 2 of 8
             TABLE 14-1.  PHYSICAL VARIABLES SUBJECT TO VALIDATION
     :=============================================================;
     Variable
 General Description of Validation Checks
  1.  Latitude
  2.  Longitude

  3.  Lake Elevation
  4.  Lake Area
  5.  Watershed Area
  6.  Site Depth
  7.  Stream Inlets and Outlets
  8.  Lake Hydro!ogic Type

  9.  Shoreline Land Use

10.  Water Temperature
11.  Secchi Disk Transparency
12.  True Color
13.  Turbidity
Lake location, as measured by LORAN, is
compared to location measured on USGS maps.
Lake characteristics are checked against
state records, where available, to confirm
lake identification.
Data are compared to aerial photographs.

Recorded temperature is checked to see if it
falls in appropriate range.
Data are checked for internal consistency.
14.2.1  Univariate Analyses

     An initial approach to outlier detection is to consider each variable
individually and to search for values that are extreme with respect to the
sample.  The method used here is the box plot (Tukey, 1977) as implemented in
SAS (SAS Institute, 1982).  The box plot summarizes the data for one variable
based on the median and upper (Fu) and lower (Fl) fourths or quartiles.  The
difference between the upper and lower quartiles is known as the interquartile
range (Fu - Fl = dF); any value greater than the absolute value of 3 dF is
identified as an outlier.

14.2.2  Bivariate Analyses

     Although values of two variables may not be outliers within their respec-
tive univariate distributions, that pair may be considered extreme relative to
some expected or typical relationship.  Scatter plots are useful for examining
expected theoretical or empirical  relationships between variables.  The bivari-
ate relationships examined in this process are shown in Table 14-2.  Outliers
are identified by visual inspection of the plots and by listing of residuals
(distances between the observed values and the fit line) based on a least-
squares regression analysis where  a linear relationship exists.  An observation

-------
                                                               Section 12.0
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 3 of 8


         TABLE 12-1.   DATA QUALIFIERS (FLAGS)  FOR  THE RAW DATA SET


FLAGS USED WITH ANION/CATION BALANCE CHECK  PROGRAM:

AO  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside
    criteria because  of unknown  cause.

Al  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of nitrate contamination.

A2  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of anion  (other than nitrate) contamination.

A3  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD} is outside criteria
    because of cation contamination.

A4  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of unmeasured organic protolytes  (fits Oliver Model).

A5  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of possible analytical  error  -  anion concentration too high
    (flag suspect anion).

A6  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of possible analytical  error  -  cation  concentration too low
    (flag suspect cation).

A7  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of possible analytical  error  -  anion concentration too low
    (flag suspect anion).

A8  Anion/cation percent ion balance difference  UIBD) is outside criteria
    because of possible analytical  error  -  cation  concentration too high
    (flag suspect cation).

FLAGS GENERATED BY APPROPRIATE BLANK EXCEPTION PROGRAM:

BO  External (field)  blank  is above expected  criteria for pH, DIC, DOC,
    conductance, ANC, or BNC determination.

Bl  Internal (lab) blank is >2 x CRDL for pH,  DIC, DOC, conductance,
    ANC, or BNC determination.
                                                                    (continued)

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                Section 12.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 8
                            TABLE 12-1.  (Continued)
B2  External (field) blank is above expected criteria and contributed
    >20 percent to sample values.  (This flag is not used for pH, DIG, DOC,
    ANC, or BNC determinations.)

B3  Internal (lab) blank is >2 x CRDL and contributes >10 percent to the
    sample concentrations.  (THIS flag is not used for pH, DIC, DOC, ANC,
    or BNC determinations.)

B4  Potential negative sample bias based on internal (lab) blank data.

B5  Potential negative sample bias based on external (field)  blank data.

FLAGS USED WITH CONDUCTANCE BALANCE CHECK PROGRAM:

CO  Percent conductance difference (ZCD) is outside criteria  for unknown
    cause (possible analytical error - ion concentration too highT

Cl  Percent conductance difference (%CD) is outside criteria because of
    possible analytical error - anion concentration too high (flag suspect
    anion).

C2  Percent conductance difference (JCD) is outside criteria because of
    anion contamination.

C3  Percent conductance difference (iCD) is outside criteria because of
    cation contamination.

C4  Percent conductance difference (ZCD) is outside criteria because of
    unmeasured organic ions (fits Oliver Model).

C5  Percent conductance difference (JCD) is outside criteria because of
    possible analytical error in conductance measurement.

C6  Percent conductance difference UCD) is outside criteria because of
    possible analytical error - anion concentration too low (flag suspect
    anion).

C7  Percent conductance difference (JCD) is outside criteria because of
    unmeasured protolyte ions (does not fit Oliver Model).

C8  Percent conductance difference (JCD) is outside criteria because of
    possible analytical error - cation concentration too low (flag suspect
    cation).
                                                                    (continued)

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                         Section 13.0
                                                                         Revision 2
                                                                         Date:  11/87
                                                                         Page 8 of 8
          13.2.6  Preparation and Delivery of Verification Tapes
              The  steps identified in sections 13.2.1 through 13.2.5 are followed to
         identify  suspect data and to correct erroneous data.  The information
         obtained  by this process is accumulated by the EMSL-LV QA staff and is
         placed on magnetic tapes, which are sent to SAI.  There, the new data are
         entered into the raw data set to correct and flag the original data.  The
         identification and transfer of corrected data for entry into the verified
         data set  are described more fully in Section 12.0.

-------
                                                                Section  14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1  of 8
                             14.0  DATA VALIDATION
14.1  OVERVIEW
     Validation is the process by which the quality of data is evaluated in
terms of the intended use of the information.   Validation  is linked  to  the
goals and methods of a project and must be defined in terms of that  project;
no single set of criteria can be applied to all  situations.  Each  step  of the
validation process further defines the quality of the data and the degree of
confidence the user can have in the data.

     In the verification step, which precedes  validation,  the quality of the
analytical chemical data is determined through a rigorous  protocol based on
known principles of chemistry.  However, not all potential sources of error
in the data are evaluated in the verification  process.  Therefore, the  purpose
of the validation process for ELS-11 is to identify errors in the  chemical
analyses not detected in verification, and to  provide a review of  the quality
of the nonchemical variables.  The physical variables subject to validation are
shown in Table 14-1.  As in verification, data found to be erroneous are
identified so that correct data can be substituted, and data that  are possibly
erroneous are flagged so that the user is alerted to their questionable status.

     Two components of data validation are the identification of outliers and
the evaluation of possible systematic error in the measurements.  The methods
used to accomplish these ends stress visual presentations  and subjective, thougn
conservative, selection procedures.  The objective is to attract attention  to
certain data values or sets of values so that  special thought and  consideration
will be given to them when the user is analyzing the data  or building models.
Ease of automation, including the ability to use available software, was also  a
consideration in selecting the methods for detection of outliers and systematic
errors.  The techniques to be used in validating ELS-II data are essentially
the same as those used for earlier surveys conducted as part of the  NSWS.   The
process of validation is summarized in Figure  14-1.

14.2  DETECTION OF OUTLIERS

     Outliers are identified using univariate, bivariate,  and multi-variate
analyses.  These procedures assist in identifying outliers that require further
scrutiny.  However, observations that are atypical with respect to the  popula-
tion may result from either analytical error or heterogeneity in chemistry
among lakes.  It is essential to separate analytical errors from abnormal  lake
chemistry to avoid the undesirable effect of purging analytically  correct
values from the data set (see Section 14.4).

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
                                                          Section 12.U
                                                          Revision 2
                                                          Date:  11/87
                                                          Page 2 of 8
(SITE
SELECTION
^ ^
1
(i DATA SET 1 ^"^

RAW

DATA
SET

V 	 	 x


DATA SET 2^
^^^—11 — ^^

VERIFIED
DATA
SET
l^__^J

DATA SCT 3
S^- 	
VALIDATED
DATA
SET
(^ 	 J

(foATA SET 4J
^^^ B--*X
ENHANCED
DATA
SET

Y
ACCESS
DISTRIBUTION
ANALYSES
) /FIELD BASE SITES/\ f ANALYTICAL ^
\SSSS^J ^ORATORIESJ
1

/DATA ENTRY BY /
* I SAI /

VERIFICATION BY
BATCH RE'OKTS. ~^ ="«•«<>*
RAnr.r rurrK? _-,_,„_
PRELIMINARY
ERL-C



/ /

SITE REPORTS. _ VALIDATION BY
..,*, -. . .* tRL-t
MAPS AND BY EMSL-LV QA.

f DATA EDITING, /
/ FLAGGING OF /
# ' / QUESTIONABLE / ~*
/ DATA /

FINAL
OF DATA


* *•

REPORTS,
..... ... .^. MAf>s
STATISTICS

* DATA TRACKING SYSTEM
Figure 12-1.   Data management for the Eastern Lake Survey -  Phase  II.

-------
                                                                 Section 14.0
                                                                 Revision 2
                                                                 Date:  11/87
                                                                 Page 3 of 8
      UNIVARIATE


* BOX PLOTS

* PROBABILITY PLOTS
                                  C)ATA SET 2
                                  VERIFIED
                                MULTIVARIATE
                             ANALYSIS
                             CLUSTER ANALYSIS
                             TRILINEAR PLOTS
                             MULTIPLE LINEAR
                             REGRESSION
   BIVARIATE


* SCATTER PLOTS

* REGRESSION
                                                                      SYSTEMATIC
                                                                      DIFFERENCES
                                               FLAG OR
                                                MODIFY
                                                VALUES
 MODIFY OR

DELETE VALUE
  YES^SYSTEMATIC
         ERROR?
                                             /DATA SET 3

                                            \ VALIDATED
         * DATA TRACKING SYSTEM
   Figure 14-1.   Flowchart of  the data  validation process, Eastern Lake
                              Survey, Phase II.

-------
                                                                Section 14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 8
TABLE 14-2.  PAIRS
==================

ANC
 OF VARIABLES USED TO CHECK FOR RANDOM AND SYSTEMATIC ERRORS
=============================================================
Aluminum (total)
Calcium
Chloride


Conductance
Potassium

Ammonium



Silica


Turbidity
pH (processing
  laboratory)

DIC (processing
  laboratory)
          vs.
          vs.
          vs.
          vs.
          vs.
          vs.

          vs.



          vs.


          vs.



          vs.


          vs.
Calcium
Conductance
Magnesium
Silica
pH (processing laboratory)

Ammoni urn
Turbidity
True color

Conductance
Fluoride (total dissolved)
Sulfate
Silica

Conductance
Sodium

Fluoride (total dissolved)
Potassium
Magnesium
Sodi urn
Silica
Sulfate

Magnesium

Turbidity
True color
BNC

pH (processing laboratory)
Magnesium

True color
Secchi disk transparancy
pH (initial and air-equilibrated)
DIC (initial and air-equilibrated)


-------
                                                                Section  14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 5 of 8


is identified as an outlier if the absolute value of its  standardized residual
[(actual-predicted)/residual standard deviation] is generally greater than 3.
The standardized residual  is defined as

                      actual value minus predicted value
                      standard deviation of the rediduals

     Because the least-squares analysis can be strongly biased  by certain
types of outliers, the residuals from resistant line fits,  lines fit through
the medians of partitions of the data (Velleman and Hoaglin,  1981),  are
examined for DOC, true color, turbidity, and Secchi disk transparency.   Other
variables are treated by use of an iterative process of linear  regression,
identification and removal of outliers, and repeated linear regression  to
identify additional  outliers that would not have necessarily  been identified
had major outliers not been removed first.

14.2.3  Multivariate Analyses

     Although examination of scatter plots  is an important  and  necessary step
for evaluating possible errors in the data, bivariate analyses  must  be  limited
to those variables that have obvious associations.   The magnitude of the data
set precludes examination of all possible distributions and bivariate plots.
For example, the number of bivariate plots  required for all combinations of the
analytical  variables exceeds 4,600.  Although many  of these combinations of
variables are of no interest, many meaningful combinations  remain.  Clearly,
this is not a practical or efficient method for examining all the data.

     An alternative method of examining data for systematic and random  errors
is through multivariate analysis in which several  variables are examined simul-
taneously.   Because theoretical relationships are expected  to exist  among
certain chemical variables, it is useful to examine these sets  of variables as
groups.

     Two primary multivariate techniques are used to identify outliers:  cluster
analysis and principal component analysis (PCA).  Cluster analysis is a  clas-
sification technique for identifying similarities (or, conversely, dissimilar-
ities) among observations.  Each observation is compared to other observations
in the set and is assigned to a group or cluster using a measure of  similarity.

     The primary clustering technique used  in the validation  process is  the
FASTCLUS procedure in SAS (SAS Institute, 1982).  This method is a nonhierarchi-
cal divisive method that is sensitive to outliers.   A less  formal clustering
technique also used for selected samples is the Trilinear Diagram (Hem,  1970).
The Trilinear Diagram is useful for examination of  possible errors associated
with the major cations and anions.  The clustering  techniques are used  for  the
related sets of variables shown in Table 14-3.

-------
                                                                Section 14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 8


     TABLE 14-3.  RELATED GROUPS OF VARIABLES USED IN MULTIVARIATE ANALYSES

    Group                         Variables


      1.           Major anions and cations

      2.           pH, ANC, DOC, true color

      3.           Turbidity, Secchi disk transparency, true color

      4.           Nitrate, phosphorus, ammonium, turbidity, Secchi disk
                     transparency

      5.           An ion deficit, DOC, true color

      6.           pH, extractable aluminum, fluoride, DOC

      7.           Silica, major cations

      8.           Iron, manganese, extractable aluminum, DOC

      9.           ANC, DIC, pH

     10.           pH, sulfate, DOC



     PCA is a technique that also is commonly used to reduce large data
matrices into manageable dimensions.  New variables called principal components
are formed from linear combinations of the original  variables so that the first
principal component reflects most of the variance or dispersion in the data.
Each successive principal  component explains less variance, and examination of
the first several components is generally sufficient to describe the data.  If
the original  data are approximately normally distributed, the resulting
principal components are also approximately normal.   Thus, a plot of any two
components typically results in an elliptical  cluster with outliers displaced
from the ellipse.

     Where appropriate, least-squares multiple linear regression techniques
also are used to identify  observations with high absolute values of the
standardized residual.

14.3  DETECTION OF SYSTEMATIC ERROR

     Methods for evaluating systematic error are less subjective because they
require a source of external  comparison.   Here the tests are similar to compar-
ison with standards with one major difference.  The external references, con-
sisting of data sets obtained from other  investigators, cannot be viewed as
"standards".   Hence, a difference between data from ELS-II and another data

-------
                                                                Section  14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  7  of 8


source does not necessarily imply that the ELS-II  data  are  in  error.  However,
comparisons with external data sources serve as aids for evaluating the  quality
of the data by bringing attention to data that may require  additional scrutiny.
Clearly, existence of systematic differences between the ELS-II  data  and several
external data sources would be cause for careful revaluation  of the  data in
question.

     Two types of systematic errors are investigated in the ELS-II data  base:
a constant additive effect (resulting in a nonzero intercept), or an  effect
that is dependent on the magnitude of the variable being measured (causing a
slope ^ 1 or nonlinearity in the relationship).

14.4  TREATMENT OF OUTLIERS AND SYSTEMATIC DIFFERENCES

     Data identified as outliers through the above procedures  may be  acceptable
when evaluated in the context of other variables or when considering  limitations
of the methods used in the ELS-II.  Therefore, before the original data  sources
are rechecked, the outliers and systematic differences  identified in  the vali-
dating process are reviewed for plausibility by the staff at ERL-C.   Data that
remain suspect following screening by staff scientists  are  sent  to the  appro-
priate organization for reexamination.

     Outliers and systematic differences for all  chemical variables are  checked
against reported values by the QA staff at EMSL-LV; site location and watershed-
related variables are reviewed by the Geographic  Research Team at ERL-C; and
remaining variables are checked by staff at SAI.   When  the  data  are rechecked
for suspect values that were identified during validation of the chemical
variables, the following possible conditions may be revealed.  These  conditions
may require the associated response listed:

                  Condition                              Response

      (1)  Suspect value in data set number   Correct value is placed in data
           2 (verified data set) is found     set  number 3 (validated data set).
           to be a transcription or trans-
           position error.

      (2)  Suspect value in data set number    Value is flagged  in data set
           2 agrees with reported value, and   number 3.
           value was flagged in verification.

      (3)  Suspect value in data set number    Value may be flagged in  data  set
           2 agrees with reported value,       number 3 depending on  evidence
           but value was not flagged in        for possible error.
           verification.

     Values flagged in data set number 2, but not  identified as  aberrant in
data validation, remain unchanged and flagged except in cases  where the flag

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section  14.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 8 of 8


is not required for interpretation of the data;  in these  cases,  the flag is
removed.  The protocol for resolution of outliers for the nonchemical  variables
is similar, with the exception that response (2) is omitted.

     Resolution of systematic differences between the ELS-II  and external
reference data involves reexamination of the methods used to  collect the ELS-II
data.  The effort involved in evaluating systematic differences  depends  on the
evidence available to suggest that a bias may exist in the ELS-II data
and the variable under consideration.

     In most cases, sufficient information to perform an  appropriate correction
for bias in the ELS-II data is not likely to be  available.  However, the identi-
fication of a possible bias is provided to assist the user in interpreting such
data.

-------
                                                                Section  15.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1  of 3
                   15.0  PREPARATION OF AN ENHANCED DATA SET
     The enhanced data set (Data Set 4)  is prepared from the validated  data set
by replacing missing values, averaging field duplicate  values,  correcting
errors, and adjusting to zero any values that are reported as negative.  The
process of preparing the enhanced data set is shown in  Figure 15-1.

15.1  SUBSTITUTION OF VALUES

     In those cases where a value is missing or incorrect (i.e.,  the  value is
identified as an outlier during validation and the aberration is  not  a  result
of an episode or some site condition) and a new value must be incorporated, the
new value is obtained from one of the following sources, listed in order from
most to least desirable:

     1.  Value from the duplicate of a routine/duplicate pair for the routine
value.

     2.  Value from an alternate sample.  For example,  both contract  analytical
laboratories analyze comparable samples  during the summer survey  as part of the
laboratory bias study.

     3.  Value of a redundant measurement on the same sample.  Redundant  analyses
are performed for pH, DIG, and conductance.

     4.  Value predicted from the best regression of related variables  (e.g.,
Ca vs. ANC, pH vs. ANC) or from the best regression of  the same variables; these
regressions include all comparisons and  combinations.

     5.  Value of the stratum mean within the subregion.

     All substitute values are reexamined for acceptability before they are
included in the final data set.

15.2  AVERAGING OF FIELD DUPLICATE PAIRS

     If field duplicate pairs have no validation flags  present, the average of
the duplicate pair values is used in the final data set.

15.3  TREATMENT OF NEGATIVE VALUES

     Negative values (for parameters other than ANC and BNC) that result from
analytical calibration bias (i.e., instrumental drift)  are set to zero.  The
bias in the estimate of variance due to  this adjustment is not likely to  affect
data analysi s.

-------
                                                                  Section  15.0
                                                                  Revision  2
                                                                  Date:  il/87
                                                                  Page 2 ot 3
             YES
SUBSTITUTE
  WITH
DUPLICATE
CALIBRATION YES^XEVIDENCE^X.
FOR BIAS * ^\ OF BIAS ^

E
E
\

1

1
NO

SUBSTITUTION
WITH REDUNDANT
VARIABLE
i
\


FLAG
SUBSTITUTION
i


COMPUTE
SUBSTITUTION
1



MULTIPLE
REGRESSION
SUBSTITUTION
1

US
1

                                                                             NO
                          /DATA SET  /
USE STRATUM
  AVERAGE
      Figure 15-1.  Flowchart  of the development of  the  enhanced data set,
                         Eastern  Lake Survey - Phase  II.

-------
                                                                Section  15.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 3
15.4  THE ENHANCED DATA SET
     Data qualifiers (flags)  are used to indicate all  values that have  been
modified for the enhanced data set.   These flags are  listed  in  Table  15-1.   If
the values for four or more variables in the same sample are identified as
extreme, the site is considered unusual.

     After the final data set is completed, all  of the data  sets will be
released by EPA and will  be made available to data users.
          TABLE 15-1.   DATA QUALIFIERS (FLAGS)  FOR VALIDATED DATA SET


UO      Known error based on relationships with other variables and/or
        impossible values; substitutions were made in data  set 4.

Ul      Value is a substitution;  original  value was missing.

U2      Value is a substitution;  original  value was considered to  be  in  error.

VO      Data value represents the average from a duplicate  split and  measure-
        ment of the lake sample.

VI      Data value is  from the duplicate sample and is not  averaged because
        the regular sample had "WO" flag limitations.

WO      Data value has possible measurement error based on  relationships
        with other variables, has QA violations, or is outside QA windows
        for acceptable data.

ZO      Original value was less than zero and has been replaced with  zero.

-------
                                                                Section 16.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 4
                                16.0 REFERENCES
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
—       Costle,  D.  M., June 14,  1979b.   Administrator's Policy Statement,  Quality
I            Assurance Requirements  for All  EPA Extramural  Projects Involving  Environ-
"            mental Measurements.   U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency,  Washington,
              D.C.
I       DeWalle, D. R., 1986.   Quality  Control/Quality Assurance Plan -  Pilot  Snowpack
              Chemistry Survey.   Internal  Report.   U.S. Environmental  Protection Agency,
•            Corvallis, Oregon.

I
I
American Public Health Association, American Water Works Association, and Water
     Pollution Control Federation, 1985.  Standard Methods for the Examination
     of Water and Wastewater, 16th Ed.  APHA, Washington, D.C.

American Society for Testing and Materials, 1984.  Annual Book of ASTM Standards,
     Vol. 11.01, Standard Specification for Reagent Water, D1193-77 (reapproved
     1983).  ASTM, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

Arent, L. J., M. n. Morison, and C. S. Soong, in preparation.  National Surface
     Water Survey, Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II, National Stream Survey -
     Phase I Laboratory Operations Report.  U.S. Environmental Protection
     Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Best, M. D., S. K. Drouse', L. W. Creelman, and D. J. Chaloud, 1987.  National
     Surface Water Survey, Eastern Lake Survey (Phase I -- Synoptic Chemistry)
     Quality Assurance Report.  EPA 600/4-86-011.  U.S. Environmental
     Protection Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Bonoff, M. B., K. J. Cabbie, D. J. Chaloud, and L. A. Drewes, 1985.  Phase II -
     Eastern Lake Survey, Spring Variability - Pilot, Field Training and Opera-
     tions Manual.  Internal Report.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Las Vegas, Nevada.

Chaloud, D. J., L. J.  Arent, B. B. Dickes, J. D. Nitterauer, M. 0. Morison, and
     D. V. Peck, 1986.  National Surface Water Survey, Eastern Lake Survey -
     Phase II, National Stream Survey - Phase I Processing Laboratory Training
     and Operations Manual.  Internal Report, U.S. Environmental Protection
     Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Costle, D. M., May 30, 1979a.  Administrator's Memorandum, EPA Quality Assurance
     Policy Statement.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Washington, D.C.

-------
                                                                Section  16.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 2  of 4
Drewes, L. A., K. J. Cabbie, D.  J.  Chaloud,  A.  W.  Groeger,  and M.  B.  Bonoff,
     1986.  National Surface Water  Survey, Eastern Lake Survey -  Phase II
     (Temporal Variability and Biological  Resources)  Field  Operations Manual
     for Summer Sampling.  Internal  Report.   U.S.  Environmental Protection
     Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Groeger, A. W., D. J. Chaloud, and  M. B.  Bonoff, 1985.   National  Surface Water
     Survey, Eastern Lake Survey -  Phase  II  (Temporal  Variability  and Biological
     Resources) Field Operations Manual  for  Spring, Summer, and Fall  Sampling.
     Internal  Report.  U.S. Environmental  Protection  Agency, Las  Vegas,  Nevada.

Grubbs, F. E., 1969.  Procedures for Detecting  Outlying Observations  in Samples.
     Technometrics, TCMTA, v. 11, n. 4,  pp.  1-21.

Hem, J. D., 1970.  Study and Interpretation  of  the Chemical Characteristics of
     Natural Water, 2nd Ed.  U.S. Geological  Survey Water Supply  Paper 1473.
     U.S.G.S., Washington, D.C.

Hillman, D. C., J. F. Potter, and S. J.  Simon,  1986.   National Surface Water
     Survey, Eastern Lake Survey (Phase  I  —  Synoptic Chemistry)  Analytical
     Methods Manual.  EPA 600/4-86-009.   U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
     Las Vegas, Nevada.

Kerfoot, H. B., T. E. Lewis, D.  C.  Hillman,  and M. L.  Faber, in final
     preparation.  National Surface Water  Survey,  Eastern Lake Survey (Phase II
     - Temporal Variability) Analytical Methods Manual.  U.S. Environmental
     Protection Agency, Las Vegas,  Nevada.

Kramer, J. R., 1982.  Alkalinity and Acidity.  In:  R.  A. Minear  and  L.  H.
     Keith (eds.), Water Analysis,  Vol.  1.  Inorganic Species, Part 1.  Academic
     Press, Orlando, Florida.

Linthurst, R.  A., D. H. Landers, J.  M. Eilers,  D.  F.  Brakke, W. S. Overton,
     E. P. Meier, and R. E. Crowe,  1986.   Characterstics of Lakes  in  the
     Eastern United States.  Volume I.  Population Descriptions and Physico-
     Chemical  Relationships.  EPA 600/4-86-007a.  U.S.  Environmental  Protection
     Agency, Washington, D.C.
McQuaker, N. R., P. D. Kluckner, and D. K. Sandberg, 1983.
     of Acid Precipitation:  pH and Acidity Determinations.
     Technol., v. 17, n. 7, pp. 431-435.
Chemical Analysis
 Environ. Sci.
Merritt, G. D., and V. A. Sheppe, in preparation.  National  Surface Water
     Survey Eastern Lake Survey (Phase II — Chemical Variability)  Field
     Operations Report.  U.S.  Environmental  Protection Agency, Las  Vegas,
     Nevada.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Section 16.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 3 of 4


Oliver, B. G., E. M. Thurman, and R. K. Malcolm, 1983.  The Contribution of
     Humic Substances to the Acidity of Colored Natural Waters.  Geochim.
     Cosmochim. Acta, v. 47, pp. 2031-2035.

Omernik, J. M., and C. F. Powers, 1983.  Total Alkalinity of Surface Waters --
     a National Map.  Ann. Assoc. of Amer. Geographers, v. 73, pp. 133-136.

Omernik, J. M., and A. J. Kinney, 1985.  Total Alkalinity of Surface Waters:  a
     Map of the New England and New York Region.  EPA 600/D-84-216, U.S.
     Environmental Protection Agency, Corvallis, Oregon.

Peden, M. E., 1981.  Sampling Analytical and Quality Assurance Protocols for
     the National Atmospheric Deposition Program.  ASTM D-22 Symposium and
     Survey, Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II (Temporal Variability and
     Biological Workshop on Sampling and Analysis of Rain).  American Society
     for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, Pennsylvania.

SAS Institute, Inc., 1982.  SAS User's Guide:  Statistics.  SAS Institute,
     Cary, North Carolina.

Todechiney, L. R., K. J. Cabbie, and J. R. Wilson, 1986.  National Surface
     Water Survey, Eastern Lake Survey - Phase II (Temporal Variability and
     Biological Resources) Field Operations Manual for Fall Sampling.  Internal
     Report.  U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Las Vegas, Nevada.

Tukey, J. W., 1977.  Exploratory Data Analysis.  Addison-Wesley Publishing,
     Reading, Massachusetts.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1980.  Interim Guidelines and Specifica-
     tions for Preparing Quality Assurance Project Plans.  QAMS-005/80.  U.S.
     EPA, Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1983 (revised).  Methods for Chemical
     Analysis of Water and Wastes.  EPA-600/4-79-020.  U.S. EPA, Cincinnati,
     Ohio.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1984a.  National Surface Water Survey,
     Phase I.  U.S. EPA, Office of Research and Development, Washington, D.C.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1984b.  National Surface Water Survey,
     Phase I.  Research Plan, A Summary of Contents.  U.S. EPA, Corvallis,
     Oregon.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, 1986.  Characteristics of Lakes in the
     Eastern United States.  EPA 600/4-86-007.  U.S. EPA, Washington, D.C.

-------
                                                                Section  16.0
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 4


Velleman, P. F., and D.  C.  Hoaglin,  1981.   Applications,  Basics,  and Computing
     of Exploratory Data Analysis.   Duxbury Press,  Boston,  Massachusetts.

Weast, R. C. (ed.), 1972.   CRC Handbook  of Chemistry  and  Physics, 53rd
     Ed., CRC Press, Cleveland,  Ohio.

-------
                                                                Appendix A
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page  1 of 13

                                   APPENDIX A
             FIELD AND PROCESSING LABORATORY DATA FORMS  AND  LABELS

                                                                            Page

Spring Variability Study Meteorological  Form 1A	 2 of 13
Spring Variability Study Sample Collection Form IB	 3 of 13
Spring Variability Study Profile Data Form 1C	 4 of 13
Phase II Spring Lake Data Form ID	 5 of 13
Phase II Summer Lake Data Form ID	 6 of 13
Phase II Fall Lake Data Form ID	 7 of 13
Batch/QC Field Data Form 2	 8 of 13
Shipping Form 3	 9 of 13
Hydrolab Calibration Form	10 of 13
Aliquot Labels	11 of 13
Labels for Special Study Samples	12 of 13
Audit Sample Labels	13 of 13

-------
                                                                          Appendix A
                                                                          Revision 2
                                                                          Date:    11/87
                                                                          Page  2  of  13
                        NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                                Spring Variability Study
                                Meteorological Form 1A
                                        Page.
                                                    . of-
DATE
 D    D   M   M   M    V
_ _  / _ _  _  / _

METEORUOGICAL DATA

Air Temp +/-  ___ *C

EST WIND SPEED
   Light    Moderate    Strong


EST WIND DIRECTION
        LAKE NAME
CLOUD COVER
Clear   25%   50%
        STATE
        LAKE I D
                               LAKE VISIT
DATE
 D   D   M   M   M    Y   <


METEORLOGICAL DATA

Air Temp */-	*C


                      Strong
                                    EST WIND SPEED
                                       Light     Moderate
                                                           EST WIND DIRECTION
                         100%
PRECIPITATION

None    Rain
                Snow
                         Sleet
RATE OF PRECIPITATION
  Light
            Moderate
Heavy
                                    CLOUD COVER
                                    Clear   25%   50%   75%   100%
                                                           PRECIPITATION
                                                           None
                                                                   Rain
                                                                           Snow
                                                                                    Sleet
                                                           RATE OF PRECIPITATION
   Light
                                                                      Moderate
                                                                                  Heavy
                 COMMENTS
                                                              COMMENTS
                               White - ORNL Pink • EMSL-LV Yellow - FwlO
                                                                               GUI'S ITOl X2-910C

-------
                                     Appendix A
                                     Revision 2
                                     Date:   11/87
                                     Page 3 of 13
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY




DATE
DOM
	 	 	
LAKE 1 D

Site ID
Time
Total Depth
Sample Deptn
HjO Temp
PH
Cond
Sample Type
Team
Site 10
Time
Toui Depth
Sample Depth
HjO Temp
PH
Cond

Sample Type
Team
Site 1 D
Time
Toui Deptn
Simple Depth
H?O Temp
PH
Cond

Semple Type
Team




SPRING VARIABILITY STUDY
Sample Collection Form 1B



M M Y Y
	 	
LAKE NAME

	 o
— — — —
	 	 . 	 m
	 	 . m
	 -cO


Cooler Temp
	 Al EMSL-LV
	 	 -C
	 O
— — 	
	 	 , 	 m
m
•cO
	 pnO
usO
Cooler Temp
	 	 	 Ai EMSL-LV
	 	 	 	 	 	 . 	 -c
	 O
	 — —
	 	 . 	 m
_t__ 	 . 	 m
•cO
	 pnO
usO
I Cooler Temp
	 	 	 At EMSL-LV
	 I 	 'C
Sue l 0
Time
Total Depth
Sample Depth
HjO Temp
PH
ConO
Sample Type
Team
Site ID
Time
Tola! Deol^1
Sample Depth
HJO Temp
pH
Cone

Sample Type
Team
Stte ID
Time
Total Deptn
Sample Deptn
H?O Temp
PH
Cond

Sample Type
Team
COMMENTS



HydfOi*b C***f»l»on Dai*

Meier 	 	 —
Initial 	 	 . 	 	 pM U
F.nai 	 	 	 	 pH W
initial 	 	 	 	 uS U
F.nai 	 	 uS O
FieioOCCnecfc 	 	 	 	 pM
Field OCCnech 	 	 	 	 uS
	 o
— — — —
	 	 m
„
	 -cO
	 pnO
usO
Cooler Temp
	 	 	 Al EMSL-LV
	 	 -C
	 o
— — — —
__ 	 	 . 	 m
	 	 m
	 	 .c O
	 PsHO
Cooler Temp
	 	 	 Al EMSL-LV
	 	 	 	 	 	 "C
	 o
— — — —
	 	 . 	 m
	 	 m
	 	 	 'C vj
	 es8
Cooler Temp
	 	 	 Al EMSL-LV
	 	 	 	 	 'C
DATA Ou»hi»n
A instrument unstable
$) Slow Stabilization
0 Din Not Meet OCC
FtoMLa* UM Only




	
	 	 	 	 	 	 	

WHI
Field Lab UM Only
Tr»,l»i 1 n I
PUIrh 1 n •


ReW Crew Del.
Quality Oeck Signature


M OMML MM* IMS* iv HUO*r fiUD
» o( «Mt*& S*mpi*>fl m $*'pn,a»m . 	




O 0 M M M Y Y

ft 	 |n
'**

-------
                                                                        Appendix  A
                                                                        Revision  2
                                                                        Date:    11/87
                                                                        Page  4  of  13
                       NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                             Spring Variability Study
                              Prolil* Oft* Form 1C
                            Page-
                                                        HrHroUb Calibration Data
DATE D  D   MM


Lake I D
      Data Oualltiert
A Instrument unstable
D Slow Stabilization
O Die NOI Meet OCC
X » Z Other leiplam in
Meter

Initial

Final

Initial
PH O
PH O
   O
                                      Comment teciioni   Frnai
                                                           	llo
Lake Name

S-ie i D
Sie Dec
Team i
Field OC Check 	 . 	 pM
Freld OC Check 	 us

tti 	 	 . 	 m tee Depifi 	 . __^ 	 m Site Depth 	 	 . 	 m Ice Depth .— . . 	 	 m
D 	 	 Team iD 	 	
DepthfmlQ






























T-C(















D















USO















PHO






























OeplhtmlQ






























T'CQ






























usQ















PHQ






























                                                        Comment!
Site I D 	 	 	 	 Tima 	 	 	 	 Site 1 D 	 	 	 	 Time 	 	 	 	
Site Depth 	 	 • . — m Ice Depth 	 . 	 	 m Site Depth . — 	 . 	 m lea Depth 	 	 m
Team I D — 	 	 — Team 1 D . 	 	 	
OeptnlmiQ






























T-CQ "SO













































PHQ






























CammwiU
ReM C
C/enf l
Quality
.nwDela
p
Check Signature
DepthimjQ






























T-CQ





























usQ















f»O



























	

Commvnti
*,
-------
                                                              Appendix  A

                                                              Revision  2

                                                              Date:    li/87

                                                              Page  5  of 13
              NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY

                    PHASE II SPRING/FALL

                  LAKE DATA FORM 1D
                                                    P«B«.

Lake ID
lake Name
SITE DEPTH (it)
SECCHI DEPTH



State
« 0 3048m 'It;
DISAPPEAR
REAPPEAR

O
o
Time
— ~
— .-
T

Oata OueUilera
Instrument Unstable
Slow Stabilization
DID Not Meet OCC
in Comment section)
_rr,O SW.IMO VISIT D
Of ALL VISIT 1 O
F»LL VISIT? D
_ m O F"-L "SIT 3 D

Meier 	
Initial 	
Initial 	
Final 	
FwW OC Check -
Field OC Cried -



ZZ-TLpnO
onO
	 usO
LlS O



                  IN SITU LAKE OATA


            DEPTH        T'C        DO


            1 Sm O      	^_ O	O


BOTTOM - 1 5m	_ O	»_ O	O


             ;(15-B-15m) —  .   O
                                                         pH
                                       	O  _.
                                       	o  _.
                                                          ._  o
                                                          ._  o
 06 SITE DEPTH     j»C

    	_o	_o	o

&T-C O 5-06 DEPTH) __»_   O
                                       IFAX- C PROCEED
                                        IF NOT STOP HEBE
                                            ,S          PH

                                       ____ O     __ .
                                                                      O
LAKE DIAGRAM (from topographic map)
                                              lfiX'CFILLIN

                                          FOLLOWING DATA BLOCK
                                      SITt MUM
                                      CH€C«CWE
                                            JW"
                                           10	O	

                                           15 	  ,  O	


                                           20	^O	
                                      1-1    30 _

                                      16    as

                                      18    40 _

                                      »    4S
                                                         ^

                                                       __O

                                                         ^O

                                                       __O
                                                           __0
                                                           	O
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           	o
                                                           __0
                                       METEOROLOGICAL DATA

                                       Air Temp •;-	'C

                                       EST WIND SPEED   D No Wind

                                       O Lighi O Moderate O Strong

                                       EST WIND DIRECTION




                                       CLOUD COVER

                                       O Clear O ?5S O SO* D 7SS O 100*

                                       PRECIPITATION

                                       O None D Rain D Snow O Sleet

                                       RATE OF PRECIPITATION

                                       O Light O Moderate O Heavy

-------
                                          Appendix A
                                          Revision 2
                                          Date:   11/87
                                          Page 6  of 1J
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
       PHASE II SUMMER
    LAKE DATA FORM 1D
Page-
                                 (Total shipment)
METEOROLOGICAL DATA
Air Temp . f~l 	 -C
O LigM Q Moderate D Strong
EST WIND DIRECTION (lrom|
DM DNC Dl Ost D& O$w Dw OMW
§LOUD COVER
Cleat O25S OSO*D75»D100*
PRECIPITATION DPREV DCurrent
O None D Rain O Snow O Sleet
RATE
D Liflm O Macerate O Heavy
SAMPLES COLLECTED BLANK D
1 5m DO 1 .8 O
UKt Hyp n fj 	 ._ O
Blm - 1 5m D D 	 n
Lake I D
^™ ~ ~~~~ ' ~*~~ ^~~ ~~' ' U»t
Lake Name *"'
Init
S DD MMM YY fcnl
° "Teem ~Siate~ f""
fD HELICOPTER
D DIRECT VEHICLE 	
*" 	 D WILDERNESS 	
*ITE DEPTH. 6"
(III X 0 3048m/l! = __ - m O
MCCHI DEPTH:
-OR- nc»
DISAPPEAR . m \J •
Ou.
_
IN (ITU LAKE DATA ""
DEPTH T.c cone oo pH r>p
:rsi oo oo
000 0
O O O O
.... 0 0 0 0
05 - O O O O
,5.O 0 0 O
25 	 O O
35 O O
45 O 0
55 	 _Q 	 Of
65 O O '
75 O OS
• 5 	 O O|
" 	 0 	 Oi
105 O O
^ 	 O 	 Ol
14.. 	 , 	 O O '
'" 	 0 	 0 1
U.S 	 O 	 O
*••• 	 . — O 	 O
22.S 0 0
24.S . Q O '
*» 	 O 	 O
2».5 . O O
Mi 	 __O 	 O
M-5 Q O
m 	 _O O
».« O O
tU . 0 0
riELO CHEW DATA
MIT

Hydrotab Calibration Dau
" 'D ^.c. ^-- ^,f
• I Th»n, , p 0 O
I Tneor 	 	 	 D O O
Hrdrolat Quality Control Data —
Initial PH O

Initial uS \J
Final 	 uS \J
 m
(blm-1 5)
• hauls


FIELD NOTES: (NOT FOB KEYPUNCH)

TC «at»-i
H2S04 --— 	
'C pn
KCL 	 _ _ 	

                    Prets firmly wtrh black ballpoint

-------
                                                  Appendix A
                                                  Revision 2
                                                  Date:   11/87
                                                  Page 7  of  13
         NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                PHASE II FALL
             LAKE DATA FORM 10
Paoe_
                                         (Total
METEOROLOGICAL DATA
A.r Temp 4- /— 	 *C
EST WIND SPEED oNowmo
D Ligni D Moderate O Strong
EST WIND DIRECTION (Iromi
Ox Oil Oi Dsi Ds Qs» O» O—
CLOUD COVER
PRECIPITATION CPREV OCurrenl
O None D Ram D Snow O Sieet
RATE
O Lignt O Mooirate O Heavy
SAMPLES COLLECTED
ism O o BLANK o
NON-VARIABILITY LAKE ~
MU vtilT I ; KltiT | - M$IT 1 -
DEPTH
I.Sm O
BOTTOM - 1 Sm 	 _ O
AT 'C (1 5-B-1 Sm
06 SITE DEPTH
Lake i D
Lane Name
^ DD MMM YY
" ACCIti state
t D HELICOPTER
E o DIRECT VEHICLE
~ — O OTHER —
SITE DEPTH.
it , X 0 X«»m/ll = 	 m C
SECCHI DEPTH
VmDie To Bottom O
-OR- —
DISAPPEAR 	 - 	 m V_/
REAPPEAR 	 m C
IN SITU LAKE DATA
FIELD CREW DATA l.o I
^MOvS/cm
•C (iS/em pH DO
	 o 	 o 	 o 	 , 	
_— O
Ift
•C DO If
«!>*• C PROCEED
NOT STO" «E = E
	 — O _ __ O _ _ 	 iiS/cm pw
WC HS-Ot DEPTH) O 	 O _ 	 O


LAKE DIAGRAM (from lopojr.ph.c map)

 40 	 O 	 O
0 « 	 0 	 0
so 	 ~O 	 O
Data OiulllMra
& Instrument unstable
O Slow staBHitation
O Die Not Mtet OCC
•X 4 4 Omar (e«piam
in Comment lection)
FIELD NOTES. (NOT PQK KEYPUNCH)
X Jlftran
M.SO. 	 — 	
•c a»
KCl _ .,_ . .. .
F«LD LA* UM
TRAILERS . ,
•ATCH ID , 	
aamut 	
DUPLICATE
•LANK
COOLER TEMP .. 	 	 •
~'yt» ^» e«eSrV '""  P"M *""** <""h B"cl1 "•"P0""

-------
                       Appendix A
                       Revision 2
                       Date:   11/87
                       Page  8  of 13
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
   BATCH/QC FIELD DATA FORM
DATE RECEIVED
BVDATAUGT	
RE INURED ________
D FORM 2 LAKES
      OR
D FORM 5 STREAMS

-------
                                                                    Appendix  A
                                                                    Revision  2
                                                                    Date:   11/87
                                                                    Page 9  of 13
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OFFICE
P.O »OX 111
ALEXANDRIA. VA 22314
                         NSWS
                        FORM 3
                      SHIPPING
RECEIVED iY 	
 IF INCOMPLETE IMMEDIATELY NOTIFY:
   SAMPLE MANAGEMENT OFFICE
         (7M) U7-MM
                                                           PAGE .
                                                                   .Of.
FROM
(STATION ID)
S»MPL£
10

01
02
03
04
OS
06
07
06
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
It
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
76
27
21
2*
30

1






























TO
(LAB)
BATCH
10
DATE PROCESSED

ALIOUOTS SHIPPED
(FOR STATION USE ONLY!
2






























3






























4






























S






























6






























7






























1






























SPU
DATE SHIPPED DATE RECEIVED
AIR-BILL NO
TS































SAMPLE CONDITION UPON LAB RECEIPT
(FOR LAB USE ONLY!















_














QUALIFIERS
       V
       M
ALIQUOT SHIPPED
ALIQUOT MISSING DUE TO DESTROYED SAMPLE
                                                   OOIO - LA> COTr FO« IKTUKN TO MK>

-------
METER ID:
                                                            Appendix A
                                                            Revision 2
                                                            Date:   il/87
                                                            Page  10 of  13
                    NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                 HYOROLAB SURVEYOR II CALIBRATION FORM
                      CREW 10:
                                             NAME.
CALIBRATION INFORMATION

PRE-CAL
POST-CAL
DATE


TIME


BAROMETRIC
PRESSURE (nun Hq)


VOLTAGE


                         pH CALIBRATION
7.00 BUFFC'
4.00 BUFr-9
TEMP(OC)

7.00 aiJFrc* !
THEOR.
VALUE


INITIAL


ADJUSTED
Y/N

IF Y CO
rro RECAL
FINAL



RECAL



                     CONDUCTIVITY CALIBRATION  CHECK
0. 1*7 mS/cm
TEMP(OC)
THEOR.
VALUE
INITIAL
ADJUSTED
Y/N -
FINAL
                  DO CALISRATION CHECK (IF APPLICABLE)

PRE-CAL
POST-CAL
TEMPC°C)


PRESSURE


THEOR.
VALUE"


INITIAL


ADJUSTED
Y/N


FINAL


 CAL SAVED?
                  "CO2 QUALITY  CONTROL CHECK SOLUTION
TE*P
PH
CONO.
fmScm -1)
NBS
TRUE*
TRUE-
PRE-OEPL
METER
FOUND
FOUND
OYMENT
DIFF (+1°C)
OIFF (*0.1i)
OIFF (»0.20)
P(
NBS
TRUE»
TRUE-
:ST-DEP
METER
FOUND
FOUND
.OYMENT
OIFF (»1°C)
DIFF (»O.IS)
DIFF (»0.20)
 COMMENTS:
  •  Table 2, surveyor II  procedures
  •• Table  1. surveyor II  procedures
  OOlSy

-------
                                                               Appendix A
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 11 of 13
ALIQUOT 1
Filtered - 250 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
HN03, 4 °C
Amount: mL
Parameters:
Ca.Mg.K.Na.Mn.Fe







ALIQUOT 2
Filtered - 10 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
MIBK - HQ, 4 °C
Amount: mL
Parameters:
Extractable Al







ALIQUOT 3
Filtered - 250 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
4 °C
Parameters:
Cl.F-.SOj-.NO,-.S10,
      ALIQUOT 4
  Filtered - 125 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID"
Date
Sampled
Preservative:
        H2S04,4 8C
Amount: 	
Parameters:
 DOC, NHA+	
                     mL
       ALIQUOT 5
   Unfiltered - 500 mL
Batch ID _
Sample ID"
Date
Sampled
Preservative:
               4 °C
Parameters: pH, Acidity,
 Alkalinity, DIC,
 Conductivity	
                                                            ALIQUOT 6
                                                        Unfiltered - 125 mL
                                                     Batch ID _
                                                     Sample ID"
                                                     Date
                                                     Sampled
Preservative:
         H2S04,4 °C
Amount:	
Parameter:
 Total P
                                                 mL
ALIQUOT 6
Filtered - 125 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
H2S04,4 °C
Amount: mL
Parameters:
Total Soluble P







ALIQUOT 7
Unfiltered - 125 mL
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
HN03, 4 °C
Amount:
Parameters:
Total Al
                            Sample  aliquot labels

-------
                                                               Appendix A
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 12 of 13
INDIANA UNIVERSITY
LAKE SPLIT
Batch ID
Sample ID
Date
Sampled

Preservative:
HN03, 4 °C
Amount: ml
Parameter:
Metals

Lake ID
Crew

Date Sampled
Time Sampled
Depth
Tow A
meters
of

Batch ID
Sample ID

Preservative: Formalin
Parameter: Zooplankton
Label  for trace metals
sample.
Label for zooplankton
tow.
Lake ID
Crew
Sample Type

Date Sampled
Volume Filtered

Time
mL
Batch ID
Sample ID

Preservative: -20 °C
Parameter: Chlorophyll
Chlorophyll label.
Lake ID
Crew



EMSL
Aliquot 1A
Date Sampled
Time Samp.

Batch ID
Sample ID

Preservative:
Amount:
Parameters: Fe

Sample Type



ANOXIC SPLIT
- Filtered - 125 mL

Time
Filtered




HN03, 4 "C
mL
, Mn
                                                        EMSL SPLIT
                                                   Unfiltered - 125 mL
                                               Batch ID
                                               Sample ID"
                                               Date
                                               Processed
                                               Preservative:   H2$U4, 4  C
                                               Amount:  	 mL
                                               Parameter:
                                                Total  N and P
                                               EMSL split label (total N
                                               and P).
Label for anoxics study sample.
                      Labels for special study samples

-------
FIELD AUDIT SAMPLE
Radian ID No.
Date
Shipped
Code
Batch
Date
Received

ID
 Field audit sample label.
      LABORATORY AUDIT SAMPLE
Aliquot No.
Date Shipped
Code
Date Received
Preservative Amount
Laboratory audit sample label.
                                          Appendix A
                                          Revision 2
                                          Date:   11/87
                                          Page 13 of 13
        Audit Sample Labels

-------
                                                               Appendix B
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 1 of 28


                                   APPENDIX  B

             ANALYTICAL LABORATORY  AND  QUALITY ASSURANCE DATA FORMS

                                                                             Page


Form 11  - Summary of Sample Results	 2 of 28

Form 11A - Summary of Sample Results	 4 of 28

Form 13  - ANC and BNC Results	 6 of 28

Form 14  - QC Data for ANC and  BNC  Analyses	 7 of 28

Form 15  - Conductance	 8 of 28

Form 16  - Anion-Cation Balance Calculation	 9 of 28

Form 17  - 1C Resolution Test	10 of 28

Form 18  - Detection Limits	11 of 28

Form 18A - Detection Limits	12 of 28

Form 19  - Sample Holding Time  Summary	14 of 23

Form 19A - Sample Holding Time  Summary	16 of 23

Form 20  - Bl anks and QCCS	18 of 28

Form 20A - Blanks and QCCS	20 of 23

Form 21  - Dilution Factors	22 of 23

Form 22  - Duplicates	24 of 28

Form 22A - Duplicates	26 of 28

Form 26  - Data Confirmation/Reanalysis Requests	28 of 28

-------
1
1
Appendix B
(Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 2 of 28
1
I !
S
__ *
1

|
^•r
I







UJ
>- cc
UJ 3
§>• H-
OC «
= v> z
I/) &• U
-J —
QC 3 W»
UJ */»
i- s -«
1— • UJ UJ
UJ -JO
O I O. <
ZS 1 5
a u. isi x
3
fc/) U. A

i i r
Z l/>
1


z
1 l


I


1









I !










=.
3
3
3-

.J
C














m





^








-







1
U.
_*
UJ ^ -x.
23 I1
CSLJ

1 -J
fl
i
si
i _j
^_
< _!
• -^.
X
UJ



4) **»
"f
_,
'I
_,
5"gi

_,



_j
£ oi


• ci

$ —1 O
vo a. *-

































u
































i^


































•^
































»
































r
































g
































o
































§
































5
































o
































-

































""
































m

































-*

































-•

































-<

































-*

































-<

































-«

































v

































>J

































~

































NJ

































*


•






























~

































^

































^

































CM

































^

































h

































n

































•o

































•t
































Z
































n
































c
































n
































*
































y
































0


c
Q.
«c
1
o
CO
1
ft)
«
f—
c
•*•
X5
a>
*j
tn
"
a>
u
«
s
3

U
1
|
:ructfons
VI
f;
|
vt
fc.
a>
**-
1

-------
Appendix B
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 3 of 28
CM
t«-
o

CM

0>
o.



>•
UJ
QC H-
^ 1? *
ce uj ^
1. 1 oc rf

a: -* -j •—
«•* Q_ 4/1
£* 5 ^
« oc «/i
ac u_ u. uj
=> O o
>- Z
_J QC <
•< < C
1 1 9
5




O
X
O







J
Z
<























































r~i


o
^
IT
_J





























fi




































j
5



*J
O
^i
cf
!rfj




















L
3
tn
4'
C


*




i
5


_^l




a. 5i
i1
r*
g!
^g
o^
u a
^
_>
Z —1
— cr

«
^.^
o
CD -^
— cr

£*
r~
z a
D

^ii
<
«-
.
-j a
_i


ud
§?

UJ ••
-1 O









































_









































~









































-,









































•









































L/l
^








































5









































^









































°?









































^ O







'

































— •









































^ -n









































tf









































n









































o



















































































0 ^



















































































-4









































:M









































r->









































«.









































rt









































-o









































^









































K









































OS









































;>









































-









































rv









































•n









































Q.









































in









































6









































s.









































CO









































»»









































D




C
IB
a.
•<
o^
&
JC
t*_
o
CD
4>

m
—
O)
U
*D
a<

>
£
a.

«i
i

-------
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE HATER  SURVEY
          FORM 11A

  SUMMARY OF SAMPLE RESULTS

                 BATCH ID
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                               Appendix  B
                                                               Revision  2
                                                               Date:    11/87
                                                               Page 4  of 2d

                                                                Page 1 of 2
Sample ID
01
02
03
04
05
06
C7
08
09
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Aliquot la
Anoxic Fe
•KJ/L








































Anoxic Mn
mg/L








































Comments








































Note:   Approved Data Qualifiers and instructions for their  use are listed in
       Exhibit B. Table  4.

-------
                                                               Appendix  B
                                                               Revision  2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  5 of 28
LAB NAME
NATIONAL  SURFACE WATER SURVEY
          FORM 11A

  SUMMARY OF SAMPLE RESULTS

      	       BATCH ID
                                                                Page 2 of 2
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
Sample ID
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
0?
10
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Aliquot 6a
Total N
mg/L








































Total ₯
mg/L








































Comments








































Note:  Approved Data Qualifiers  and instructions  for their use are  listed in
       Exhibit B. Table 4.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
   I
   I
Lab Name
NATIONAL SURFACE HATER SURVEY
          Form 13

ALKALINITY AND  ACIDITY RESULTS

     Batch ID
                                                                    Appendix B
                                                                    Revision 2
                                                                    Date:   11/87
                                                                    Page  6 of 23
                                                                       Page  1 of 1
Sample ID
.ab Manager's Signature Analyst
EE SUITS
[Alk] - ueq/L
DATA
:A - eq/L
:B • eq/L
ACID TITRATION
VOLUME HC1
(ml)
0.00
0.00 (with KC1)
































MEASURED
PH1


































CALCULATED
pH


































INH
BLAK
DATE
DATE
IAL SAMPLE VOLUME
K ALKALINITY
ml
ueq/L
STANDARDIZED
STANDARDIZED
BASE TITRATION
VOLUME NaOH
(mL)
0.00
0.00 (with KC1)
































MEASURED
PH1


































CALCULATED
pH



































-------
                                                                 Appendix B
                                                                 Revision 2
                                                                 Date:   11/87
                                                                 Page  7  of  23
                       NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                                  Form 14*

                           QC DATA FOR ALKALINITY
                            AND ACIDITY ANALYSES
               Page 1  of 1
LAB NAME
BATCH ID
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
SAMPLE
ID
o:
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
Alk
ueq/L






























C02-Acy
ueq/L






























CALCULATED AH
RESULT






























DIFFERENCE3






























JDb






























•Form not required  in data package  but recommended for  internal QC requirements.

* Difference - Calculated AH-Measured AH

                     DIC (in umoles/L)-([AH] + [C02-Acy])
                                                          x 100
                                     DIC

-------
Appendi x B
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 8 of 23


.^
o
*
a. UJ
s
iy>
t/>
or
UJ
i
>- S
£
§ B
VI Z
CK *
U O
it i
w~ S
u e
< L. l_)
U, O •-
of u. u.
I/) IJ
-J a.
« »/>
S °
f-
2 5
CD



i
_j



















*•».
ix)
a
K
D
r
*j
X
4-
E
J
5
J
••
AJ
X
3
^J
U
_)
_j
C






S
X
Z
Z
1
*£
*«
1
m
O
•*•
ac
t
o
t*1
o
o
(NJ
«
's

ui
0













*
*
Measured
Calculated

"















^































C3































O















3















O















0















o































































































































































































^















tM















rvj















r\j















^















1X1















r\j































i-J
















O —1
~* •**
XI. f
O —I
XV 01
in Q.r-
n
in
rg
S
•-*
in
••4
CM
0
rsj
CM
CD
eg
S
o

i
t,
*• C
5 aeh*
uo m
3 — CM
v
C «•- *J
O 0 t required If
Calculated
c
R f
£ i




>
4
<

C
«
&
«
C7
•1
U 4^
C
*> e
u
a tn
? i
o
u "a
«*- H-
T< c
v> e
x> S
? "


1
3
«
0
Z

-------
                                                                       Appendix B
                                                                       Revision 2
                                                                       Date:   11/87
                                                                       Page 9  of  2a
LAB NAME
 NATIONAL  SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           Form 16*

ANION-CATION BALANCE CALCULATION

     BATCH ID           LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                                              Page 1 of 1

'Sample
ID
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
16
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
ie
27
28
29
30
Z Ion
Difference **






























Factors to Convert
mg/L to ueq/L
Ions - 1 ueq/L)
Ca+2






























49.9
ci-






























28.2
Mg+2






























82.3
N03~






























16.1
K*






























25.6
Na+






























43.5
S04-2






























20. e
F-






























52.6
NH4*






























55.4
ALK






























•H^MK
H+***






























^••••^•v
  *Form not required  in data package but  recommended for internal QC requirements.

                             ANC + r Anions - I Cations (except  H+)
 **l Ion Difference  (JID)

   (Alk   ANC)

***[H+] - (10'PH)  x  106
   I Anions + I Cation + ANC + 2[H+]
                                       x 100

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                         NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                                    Form 17
                               1C RESOLUTION TEST
                                                                Appendix  B
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  10 of  28
                                                                          Page 1 of 1
LAB NAME
BATCH ID
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
1C Resolution Test
1C Make and Model:_
Date:
Concentration:   SO^
                                             ug/mL,
                                                                               ug/mL
        Column Back Pressure (at max. of stroke):
        Flow Rate: 	  mL/min
        Column Model:
                                                                  psi
                                         Date of Purchase:
Column Manufacturer:
Column Serial No:
Is precolumn in system   _
(a)              cm    (b)
                              Yes
                                                  No
                                        cm
Percentage Resolution:   100 x (1-a/b)
The resolution must be greater than 60%
Test Chromatogram:

-------
                                                              Appendix B
                                                              Revision 2
                                                              Date:   11/87
                                                              Page 11  of Z
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           Form 18

       DETECTION LIMITS

                BATCH ID
                                                               Page 1  of  1
LAB MANAGER'S  SIGNATURE
Required
Detection
Parameter Units Limit
Ca mg/L 0.01
Mg mg/L 0.01
K mg/L 0.01
Na mg/L 0.01
Mn mg/L 0.01
Fe mg/L 0.01
AT.
Extractable mg/L 0.005
CT mg/L 0.01
S042" mg/L 0.05
N03" mg/L 0.005
Si02 mg/L 0.05
F-. Total mg/L 0.005
NH4* mg/L 0.01
DOC mg/L 0.1
Conductance uS/cm **
DIC mg/L 0.05
P, Total mg/L 0.002
Al, Total mg/L 0.005
Instrumental
Detection
Limit*


















Type
Flag


















Date Determined
(DD MMM YY)


















 *To be calculated as requirea  in  Section 9.6 of the QA plan and filled
  out by the analytical  lab
"Report the Y, which must not  exceed 0.9 uS/cm, of six (6)  nonconsecutive
  blanks
Note 1:  Report with four significant figures or down to IDL
Note 2:  Indicate the instrument for which the IDL applies with an "F"  (for
         furnace AA), a  "P"  (for ICP), or an "L" (for flame AA) after the IDL
         value.

-------
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
          Form ISA

       DETECTION LIMITS

                 BATCH ID
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                                Appendix B
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 12 of 28
                                                                 Page 1 of 2
                                   Aliquot 1A
==============================================================================
Parameter
Anoxic Fe
Anoxic Mn

Units
mg/L
mg/L

Instrumental
Detection
Li mi t*
0.01
0.01

Date Determined
(DD MMM YY)



Comments



*To be calculated as required in Exhibit E and filled out by the Contractor
 Laboratory.
Note:  Report with four significant figures or down to IDL.

-------
                                                               Appendix B
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  13 of  28
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
          Form ISA

       DETECTION LIMITS

                 BATCH ID
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                   Aliquot 6A
                                                                 Page  2  of  2
Parameter
Total N
Total P

Units
mg/L
mg/L

Instrumental
Detection
Limit*



Date Determined
(DD MMM YY)



Comments



*To be calculated as required in Exhibit E and filled out by the Contractor
 Laboratory.

-------
                                                                                Appendix B
                                                                                Revision 2
                                                                                Date:    li/87
                                                                                Page 14 of  28
LAB NAME
                               BATCH  ID
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
          FORM 19

 SAMPLE HOLDING TIME SUMMARY

          LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                                                           Page 1 of 2
DATE  SAMPLED
                               DATE RECEIVED
Parameter
Holding
Time
Holding Tine
Plus
Date Sampled
Sample ID:
01
OZ
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
1Z
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
ZZ
23
24
25
26
Z7
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
Ca
28

Mg
28

K
28

Na
28

Mn
28

Fe
28

Extr. Al
7

CT
28

S042'
28

NO^
7

S102
28

ISE
Total F-
28

Date Analyzed

































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































-------
                                                                                Appendix  B
                                                                                Revision  2
                                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                                Page  15 of 28
LAB NAME
                               BATCH 10
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           FORM 19

 SAMPLE HOLDING TIME  SUMMARY

         LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                                                         Page 2 of 2
DATE SAMPLED
                               DATE RECEIVED
Parameter
Holding
Time
Holding Time
Plus
Date Sampled
Sample ID:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Z7
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
DOC
14










































NHa*
28










































Eq. pH
7

Date








































Acidity
(BNC)
14










































Alkalinity
(ANC)
14

t








































Conductance
14

analyzed








































Eq. DIC
14










































Init. DIC
14










































Total P
28










































Total Al
28











































-------
                                                                Appendix B
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 16 of  28
 Aliquot  1A
LAB NAME 	
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
DATE SAMPLED
NATIONAL  SURFACE HATER  SURVEY
          FORM 19A

 SAMPLE HOLDING TIME SUMMARY

                 BATCH ID
                 DATE  RECEIVED
Parameter
Holding Time (Days)
Holding Time Plus
Cj .- ._rpled (Days)
Sample ID:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
OB
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Anoxic Fe
28

DATE ANALYZED*









































Anoxic Mn
28

DATE ANALYZED*












































COMMENTS









































 *If parameter was reanalyzed due to QA problems, report the  last date andlyzed.

-------
                                                                  Appendix B
                                                                  Revision 2
                                                                  Date:    11/87
                                                                  Page 17  of  28
 Aliquot 6A
LAB NAME 	
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
DATE SAMPLED*
NATIONAL  SURFACE HATER SURVEY
          FORM 19A
 SAMPLE HOLDING TIME SUMMARY
Page 2 of  2
                 BATCH ID
                                          DATE  RECEIVED*
Parameter
Holding Time (Days)
Holding Time Plus
Date Sampled (Days)
Sample ID:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40

Total N
28

DATE ANALYZED*









































Total P
28

DATE ANALYZED*












































COMMENTS









































  •Report these  dates as Julian dates  (i.e.. March 26, 1984  « 4086).
 **If parameter  was reanalyzed due to  QA  problems, report the last date analyzed.
   (as Julian date).

-------
1
1
1
1
1
1
1


1


1
1


1

1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1



(VI
*4-
0


UJ
tt
3
t—
z
o
-E
UJ
>- IS
UJ <
ac f
CO
cc <
UJ _J
2 <~>
u
UJ O
0 O
< c«j o
u. z
§1 *
to O l/>
g" 1
5 0
z
z



UJ
1
m



Appendix B
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 18 of 28











2
3
:-y
•f























m





CM



















1
U.
-J
UJ F— •»»
bO « Dl
I- <•> E
o
t—
o ^»
£ I
z7!
CM •>»
0*?
1X1
'=*
• —I
I. — ,
** 5
x B
UJ
.^

_J
•I1
•o ^»
_J
"»


— •/
^ ?
_J
•a *•»»
tJ ppr



i
£
a
a.




























c
o

i- ^
IB m


z



z

z

z
c


z


SE
E
X



K
E



C
 i.
§1



























k. 4->
!•§

-> 0
|J






























IB
C




























Ol
C
c
4J
c
o




























•M
Ol
C
c
c




























Ol
c
c
4J
c
0




























Ol
c
c
c
9




























ft
en
c
3
C
C
0































C
U.




























§

o »•
0
£ 3
~- t—
Z


























1.

^L"*
= =

l_> O
cr L.
||


























k.

0 ₯
/»
-) O
JC C
£ w






























ie
c




























Ol
c
e
e
o
L>




























Ol
C
3
C
I




























•>
Ol
c
3
e
§




























01
c
c
I




























4*>
Ol
e
s
c
c































c




5
a.
Or
J
tf
ao
i
Cf>
01
IB
C
T5
4->
Ol
i.
3
U
o>
c
4->
u
o
t~
0
4-*
3
i/>
C
0
c
M
L_
0>
cr
10
10
o
01
o
a.

Of

-------
                                                                  Appendix B
                                                                  Revision 2
                                                                  Date:   11/87
                                                                  Page 19 of  28
                         NATIONAL  SURFACE HATER  SURVEY
                                   FORM 20
LAB NAME
BATCH  ID
BLANKS  AND QCCS

             LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
                                                                        2 of 2



Parameter
Cal i £>i :'.icn
Blank
Reagent Blank
DL theoretical
QCCS measured
High QCCS
True Value
Low QCCS Upper
Control Limit
Low QCCS Lower
Control Limit
Initial
Continuing I
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final
High QCCS
True Value
High QCCS Upper
Control Limit
High QCCS Lower
Control Limit
Initial
Continuing 1
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final

<

DOC
»g/L

N
N
N























NH4+
mg/L

N
N
N























Eq
pH
N
»
N
N






















Measured
Alk
(ANC)
PH
N
N
N
N




















ALIQUOT


Acy
(BNC)
pH
N
N
N
N




















ID
5

Cond.
uS/cm

N
N
tf























Eq.
DIC
mg/L

N
N
N























Init.
DIC
mg/L

N
N
N











-









6

Total
P
mg/L

N























7

Total
Al
mg/ L
























Note:  Approved data qualifiers and instruction for their  use are listed in Table 9-8
       of the QA plan.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
LAB NAME
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
DATE SAMPLED*
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
          FORM 20A

       BLANKS AND QCCS

             BATCH ID
                                                               Appendix B
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 20 of 28
                                                                   Page 1 of 2
             DATE RECEIVED*
Parameter
Calibration Blank
DL Theoretical
QCCS Measured
Low QCCS True Value
Low QCCS Upper Control
Limit
Low QCCS Lower Control
Limit
Initial
Continuing 1
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final
High QCCS True Value
High QCCS Upper Control
Unit
High QCCS Lower Control
Limit
Initial
Continuing 1
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final

ALIQUOT 1A
Anoxic Fe
mg/L
























Anoxic Mn
mg/L
























Comments
























Note:  Approved data qualifiers and instruction for their use are listed in
       Exhibit B, Table 4.

-------
                                                               Appendix  B
                                                               Revision  2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 21 of  28
LAB NAME
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
DATE SAMPLED*
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           FORM 20A

       BLANKS AND QCCS

             BATCH ID
                                                                   Page  2  of 2
             DATt  RECEIVED*
Parameter
Calibration Blank
DL Theoretical
QCCS Measured
Low QCCS True Value
Low QCCS Upper Control
Limit
Low QCCS Lower Control
Limit
Initial
Continuing 1
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final
High QCCS True Value
High QCCS Upper Control
Unit
High QCCS Lower Control
Limit
Initial
Continuing 1
Continuing 2
Continuing 3
Continuing 4
Continuing 5
Final

ALIQUOT 6A
Total N
mg/L
























Total P
mg/L
























Comments
























Note:   Approved data qualifiers
       Exhibit B, Table 4.
        and instruction for their use are listed in

-------
I
I
I
Appendix B
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 22 of 28.
1
1
1
1
1

1

1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
o
- X
et £>
to i/i
ex 


NJ








1
LL.
_l
UJ ^"~
1X1 ID O1
h- i
if
I
eg —i
£1
1 _J
u o<
r-

i

Q. c
< 1«
C3- 3
1- OJ
^ C
«
•o i-
o>
•o c
C 0
f+J
•0
je but rec
>r concentr

f 
*J CD
•E I
a 
i- 01
'•- *->
a «o
cr u
u .-
i- -o
c
4-» •—
C
E oi
1. »->
a- Z

-------
                                                                         Appendix  3
                                                                         Revision  2
                                                                         Date:    11/87
                                                                         Page 23 of 28
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE HATER SURVEY                     Page 2 of 2
          FORM 21*

       DILUTION FACTORS

  BATCH ID              LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE
SAM-
PLE
ID:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
IS
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
ALIQUOT ID
4~
DOC
mg/L








































NH/
mg/L








































5
Measured
Eq.
pH








































Alk
Init. pH








































•Form not required in the data pac
Acy
Init. pH








































C0?
Acy
ueq/L








































AH
ueq/L








































Cond.
uS/cm








































Eq.
DIC
mg/L








































Init.
DIC
mg/L








































6
Total
P
mg/L








































7
Total
Al
mg/L








































Icage but recommended for QA purposes.
Note:  Indicate samples run on higher concentration range by using a check nark  for each
       parameter.

-------
                                                                         Appendix  B
                                                                         Revision  2

                                                                         Date:    11/87

                                                                         Page i>4 of 2
•
ce
  E   <
UJ W   O
«_> O   —"
< U,   _J
u.     a.
3     r>
i/>     o
          00
          CD












2

w
o-
<
















r>









CM












u.
UJ 1— — .
IO ID Ol
« 4J E
o
n

1 <*>-»
ii1
1 — 1
esj ^
o*?1
CO

i -J
<_> cp
— «c
•O • -J
*•> t- -^
O *-> CT>
r- X I
UJ
-J
U- t7>


if


_J
«o *^
E
-1
_J
O O)



V.
A)
*J
i
(O
rO
0.


































*2
10 
o. a>
3 ex;
0




































8
ac





























a>

*a. a!
3 QC
0




































0
ce
M





























41
*J
<0
u

•a2
3
O Oi
•o o.
i. E
T- 1C
f 10































^i
y^
2
in
a<
ee

Ol
R
to


































O
4->
« *•
U r—
1r— V
Q. 01
3 Of
0




































Of


"o.
Cr
0'
jr
o
cr>
t
ai
UJ
r—
c
Oi
C/l
•*-

a>
3
l.
ai
t.
0
in
c
o
•"J
u
3
4-)
C
C
1-
CT
T)
•o

>
O
I
Q.
O.
•T

cu
o

-------
                                                                       Appendix B
                                                                       Revision 2
                                                                       Date:   11/87
                                                                       Page  25 of  Z
  o

  CM
  <0
  Q.
3 CNJ   I—
  CM   <
uj     o
o e   —
< u   _i
U. O   0.
oe u.   =}
=     a
<

O
          O
          K-
          «t
          CD





n
<







CO
r^
J3


Lf)



Measurec




C7> >v.
U • (71
0 «-> E
LU
>O —I
l<^
« —1
•*-> 0. *x.
4-> O _J
c c^ 2^
•^ £
* ^J ^j
cr—« -»»
jJ o en
u -D E
Ol C U
Q. o-^
 O I/I
i— CT
«r 01
3.
0 CT
< 01
U 4-1 X
< — 0.
C
< f- O.
c
LU d
+ _l
§|
Parameter













Ol —

U i—
"5. o
3 at
o













c
of













01 O
*J — i
IO
U 01
•O -f- i—
c r- a.
0 0. E
0 3 «
C) 0 
in













V
a>
Of
Ol
n













Duplicate
Result













at
M













Ol
IO
u
i.2
3
O Ol
•o *c
u G













V
Ol
n













Duplicate
Result













*
t/
cc
•*


c
>o
"a.
o-
Ol
4-1
O
1
Ol
VI £2
C it)
0 1—
*-> c
10 -t-
— -o
E Oi
o; vi
V •—
T3
Ol
a.  C
l« 0
•erence
instruc
•t- C
Ol W
3 Ol
O *-
Ifl -r-
10 10
Kl
l-
o
a. ••
o> 01
Ct 4->
o
« z

-------
                                                                Appendix B
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 26 of  28
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           FORM 22A

          DUPLICATES

                  BATCH ID
                                                                    Page  1  of  2
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE

Parameter
Duplicate Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
ZRSD
Second Duplicate
Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
ZRSD
Third Duplicate
Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
ZRSD

Al i quc
Anoxic Fe
mg/L













it la
Anoxic Mn
mg/L














Comments














Note:  Approved data qualifiers and instructions for their  use  are listed in
       Exhibit E, Table 4.

-------
                                                                Appendix B
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 27 of  28
LAB NAME
NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
           FORM 22A

          DUPLICATES

                  BATCH ID
                                                                    Page  2  of  2
LAB MANAGER'S SIGNATURE


Parameter
Duplicate Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
ZRSD
Second Duplicate
Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
ZRSD
Third Duplicate
Sample ID
Sample Result
Duplicate Result
JRSD

Aliquc
Total N
mg/L













)t 6a
Total N
mg/L














Comments















Note:  Approved data qualifiers and instructions for their use are listed in
       Exhibit E, Table 4.

-------
                                                                                          Appendix  B
                                                                                          Revision  2
                                                                                          Date:     11/87
                                                                                          Page  28  of  28
UAU itNl
OAll RtUIVlU
latch <
The following values































NSUS






























N
Data Co
Contract Analytics
requ i re : (

Samplr I.D

















ATIONAl SURI-ACL MAUK SURVIT
FORK 2k
nl irmation/keanalysis Request Forei
) Laboratory Laboratory Suoervisor
.onftmation (See
Suspect
Original

















!




















1
1 ) Reana 1 y

Reconfirm!/
New
Valur






























is (See 11)
Uolanatton
Contract
Analytic*)
Laboratory






























Ltnicq






























I.  Conf i nut ion Request:  Did JKT Mines  clunoe:  	 Tes  _ No
    If yes, rtcsoft  (note abort in cxp)«njtion coluwi):
       (A)  Reporting Irror                 (C)  Orioiiul reported ollut did not clunge
       (II  Calculation Error                (0)  04 La Pre>lous)y Omit Ire
                                           (E)  Other . EipUin
    If values cMnoeC, submit supporting r*u data AS REQUIREO.
Additional COMwflU R«9ardin9 ConfinMtlon: 	^	
II.   RMiulysi! Rrouested Pur to:*
     	 External OA Pata
     	 Internal DC Data Indicated Belon:
             	 1C Resolution
             	 IOL > CROl
             	 Blank > 2 i CRDl  (Reagent; Calibration)
             	 OCCS Outside Criteria (DL: Low; High)
             	Sample Concent rat. i or* Outside Calibration Range
             	 PCCS Mot in Hid-Rangc of Calibration Range
             	 Duplicate Precision (* RSO) Outside Criteria; Insufficient Nuntier of Duplicates
                     Analytcd
Additional Caiments Regarding  Reanalysis:
•   An abbreviated  version or  NSWS foms  II, Id. IS,  and 20 MSI  be submitted  for all reanalyzed dala.
    KSWS Forms 13,  17, and 22  nsl be submitted unen  applicable.
FOR UI6CO USE ONLT:  INITIAL  REVIEW .
                    VERIFICATION
. KMBEII OF VALUES SUBMITTED .
  •MBEB OF VALUES CHANCED

-------
                                                                Appendix  C
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  1  of 18
                                   APPENDIX C

                   FIELD OPERATIONS AND PROCESSING LABORATORY
                        ON-SITE EVALUATION QUESTIONNAIRE
                             GENERAL (Page 1  of 1)
                                     Questionnaire Completion  Date
Field Base

Location
Processing Laboratory Supervisor
Questionnaire completed by  (If more than one,  indicate sections completed
by each auditor.)

-------
O
to
Q.
ce.
o
o;
o
CD
oo
o
Q£
CL
*
*
- Q.
X
UJ
*
en
•— c
(0 -i-
•i- C
O •>-
o> re
Q. I-
00 t—
•It
O en
•r- C
E,__
•r-
01 C
~n •!—
\J r—
(O re
0 t_
eC 1—
OJ
E
«3
z



C
o
[ ^
to
o
co-



































ordinator
o
<_5
>i
o
•(-»
ro
i_
o
.0
(O
	 i
O)
C
to
to
o>
(J
o
(.
Q.


























pervisor
3
OO
>i
O
+J
fO
l_
o
JD
(O
_J
cn
C
•1^
to
to
o>
o
o
t_
o.




































4->
to
>,

CO
C

to
>,

(0
C
et




































+J
to
>,

1

ro
C
eC




































4->
(/J
>,

ro
C
eC




































-t->
to
>,

ro
C
ct
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 2  of  18
                                                           O)
                                                           o;
                                                           Ol
                                                           «3

                                                           T3
                                                           S_
                                                           ro
                                                           ro  o
                                                           O) M-
                                                              O)
                                                              Q.
                                                           "— -Q

                                                           o  o
<— -M
to
•r- 4J
O C
O> «3
Q. >
to OJ

T3 O)
C t-
                                                           O)
                                                           a)
                                                           OV
                                                           CD
                                                           to
                                                           0)
   OJ
   O
   C
   QJ

   L.
   (U
   Q.
   X
   0)
                                                              c
                                                              O
                                                           to

                                                           _J
                                                           •K

-------
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  3  of 18
         PROCESSING LABORATORY - STANDARD  OPERATING  PROCEDURES  (Page  1 of  1)
Item
Is the training manual followed in detail?
Are copies available in the processing laboratory?
Are analysis logbooks kept up to date?
Are all on-site changes in procedures clearly documented and
justified in processing laboratory supervisor's logbook and
approved by appropriate personnel?
Yes




No




Comments:

-------
                                                                Appendix  C
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  4  of 18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY FACILITIES (Page 1  of 1)
Item
Is the labortory kept clean and organized?
Are the refrigerator and freezer temperatures
monitored on a daily basis and recorded in a
logbook?
Are waste disposal containers available and
clearly labeled, and is waste disposed of
properly?
Are chemicals stored properly?
Is balance calibration checked daily and
recorded in a logbook?
Is water supply purity monitored daily and
recorded in a logbook?
Yes






No






Comment






General Comments:

-------
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 5 of 18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY  EQUIPMENT  (Page  1 of 7)
Color Test Kits
Item
Is manufacturer's operating manual readily
available?
Is kit cleaned and stored properly?
Are viewing tubes kept clean?
Is logbook kept up to date and signed daily?
Is centrifuge maintained and kept clean?
Yes





No





Comment





Comments:

-------
                                                                Appendix C
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 6 of 18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT (Page 2 of 7)
Nephelometer
Item
Is manufacturer's operating manual available?
Is instrument kept clean?
Are cuvettes kept clean and scratch-free?
Is logbook kept up to date and signed daily?
Is calibration checked before and after every
8 samples?
Are standards kept refrigerated when not in use?
Yes






No






Comment






Comments:

-------
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 7  of 18
                    PROCESSING LABORATORY  EQUIPMENT  (Page  3  of  7)
Carbon Analyzer
Item
Is manufacturer's operating manual available?
Is instrument kept clean?
Is the injection valve flushed daily after use
with deionized water?
Is logbook kept up to date and signed daily?
Is IR analyzer power left on at all times?
Is standard stock solution prepared biweekly,
and is QC stock solution prepared weekly;
are they stored at 4°C?
Are working standards prepared daily?
Is exposure of samples and standards to the
atmosphere minimized?
Is required QC followed?
Are pump tubes checked for wear and
replaced on a regular basis (about every 2 weeks)?
Are syringes and glassware cleaned
properly after use?
Are C02 and moisture scrubbers on
standard bottles replaced when exhausted?
Is tin scrubber in IR analyzer checked
daily and refilled when necessary?
Yes













No













Comment













Comments:

-------
                                                                Appendix  C
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  8  of 18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT  (Page  4  of  7)
pH Apparatus
Item
Are meter and electrode operating manuals
available?
Is logbook kept up to date and signed daily?
Is j)H QC sample prepared daily?
Is electrode stored in 3M KC1?
Is required QC followed?
Are electrodes checked and filled (if
necessary) prior to use?
Are sample chambers cleaned after use?
Are buffers capped tightly after use?
Yes








No








Comment








Comments:

-------
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  9  of 18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY  EQUIPMENT  (Page  5  of  7)
Filtration and Preservation Apparatus
Item
Is hood kept neat and clean?
Is contamination evident?
Is hood sealed when not in use?
Is filtration apparatus kept ultraclean as
specified?
Are precautions taken to prevent contamination
of filtrators, filter funnels, filters, sample
bottles, and reagents?
Is a water trap used with the vacuum pump?
Are micropipets kept in an upright position
at all times?
Is the calibration of micropipets checked
weekly?
Are sample aliquots properly labeled?
Is vacuum maintained at 10 to 12 inches Hg while
f i Itering?
Yes










No










Comment










Comments:

-------
                                                                Appendix  C
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  10 of  18
                    PROCESSING LABORATORY EQUIPMENT  (Page  6  of  7)
Flow-Injection Analyzer
Item
Is the FIA operating manual available?
Is the FIA logbook kept up to date and signed
daily?
Is the PCV reagent prepared fresh daily?
Is glassware labeled and each piece dedicated to a
particular reagent?
Are changes in the baseline recorded on a tally
sheet?
Are weekly and daily maintenance procedures
followed?
Is the flow cell regularly inspected for dirt
and scratches?
Yes







No







Comment







Comments:

-------
                                                               Appendix C
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page  11 of  18
                 PROCESSING LABORATORY  EQUIPMENT  (Page  7  of  7)
MIBK Extraction
Item
Is the centrifuge operating manual available?
Is the extraction logbook kept up to date and
signed daily?
Is leakage of sample volume (_> 8.5 ml) noted in
the logbook?
Are reagents (NaOAc and hydroxyqu incline) made
fresh daily?
Is NH40H made fresh weekly and the preparation
recorded in the logbook?
Are pipets calibrated weekly?
Is the 25 ml of standard measured accurately?
Is the sample buffered to pH 8?
Is the buffer/MlBK solution shaken vigorously
for 10 seconds?
Is disposal of solid and liquid wastes conducted
properly?
Yes










No










Comment










Comments:

-------
                                                                Appendix  C
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  12 of  18
                        SAMPLE PROCESSING (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Are all station documents kept in an orderly
fashion?
Are all forms completed as required and signed
by supervisor?
Is laboratory audit notebook kept up to date
(labels inserted, etc.)?
Are audit samples assigned different ID numbers
from day to day?
Are samples kept at 4°C when not being used?
Are coolers containing sample kept in the
shade and shut?
Are freeze-jjel j)acks kept frozen?
Are samples properly packed for shipping
(sealed, cooled to 4 °C, individually
wrapped, etc.)?
Are two copies of the completed shipping form
included with batch of samples?
Yes









No









Comment









Comments:

-------
















i-H

^^~
0
r— 1
OJ
CD
re
Q-
>_»*

_J
UJ

-3*
o
OO
o:
UJ
a.
3
UJ
a:
0

CI3
^
»— H
J
__l
a.
i
00

o
_j
UJ
»— 1
u.























*
*
0)
u
i/) ai
(U O)
>- Q.
X
UJ
CD
•— C
re ••-
O -i-
a> re
Q. s_
oo H-





*
O CD
•i- C
E -r-
Ol C
-O T-
re re
u i—

f
O)
CD





O)
E
re















c:
0

+*
o
a.
























































-J-
o
t
(_> ^"™v X— X *^~x
u u aj QJ a*
OJ QJ t- C- (-
0 •(-> O 00
•1— Q.

M- (J C C C
O •<- 3 3 3
•— t. O 0 O
^*> QJ QJ ^~ t— ^— 5— C— t— *—
_^-> -*^ ^ ^ frt ^ ^ rrt t» ^^ ^,5 ^ GJ
Q OCUCL "OQ. T3Q. "OQ.
et i— to e coreE oree Q«OE
-o -i-jDre aire aire a>re
.^ L! . . . u • « L! • • t. • •
U. <_5^-tOJCO Or- ICVJ O^-ICVJ OrHOO
• . . .
 >4-
>^ t-
a>
•!-> Q.
to
•i- a>
^— ^-^
O O
to .(->
r—
«f -*
t/>
re
re
•^ +^
u c
O) re
Q. >
to a>
r*—
-o ai
c c-
re
a) 4-*
c o
• r*» O)
re t-
•(-> -r-
f$ T^J
o
a>
0) U
01 C
L QJ
CT* *r~
0) (-
T3 Ol
Q.
to O)
Ol
^"Z
jc o
to to
•r- -r-
^^
•K
Appendix C
Revision 2
Date:  11/87
Page 13 of 18

-------
                                      Appendix  C
                                      Revision  2
                                      Date:   11/87
                                      Page  14 of  18
FIELD SAMPLING (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Has adequate space been provided for
predeparture activities?
Are facilities clean and organized?
Is equipment clean and organized?
Yes



No



Comment




-------
                                         Appendix  C
                                         Revision  2
                                         Date:   11/87
                                         Page  15 of  18
HYDROLAB CALIBRATION (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Are copies of the Hydrolab manual available?
Is the logbook kept up to date and signed daily?
Is the instrument cleaned and stored properly?
Is someone at the field base capable of performing
the maintenance procedures described in the
manual?
Has any other maintenance been necessary?
Are adequate spare parts (batteries, etc.)
available?
Are backup units available?
Is the instrument performing well in the field?
Are there any problems with the instrument?
Is the person performing the calibration
familiar with the procedures and control limits?
Have there been any deviations from the standard
procedures?
Are the QC samples prepared each day?
Is the instrument calibrated before and rechecked
after each excursion?
Yes













No













Comment














-------
                                             Appendix  C
                                             Revision  2
                                             Date:   11/87
                                             Page  16 of  18
FIELD SAMPLING - PREPARATION (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Are checklists followed for loading equipment?
Was sampling ever aborted due to forgotten items?
Is equipment organized and easily accessible on
sampling craft or vehicle?
Is equipment stored properly to prevent injury
or damage during transport?
Are adequate plans for the excursion made and
understood by personnel?
Does the field base coordinator know where all
teams are at any given time?
Yes






No






Comment







-------
                                           Appendix C
                                           Revision 2
                                           Date:   11/87
                                           Page  17 of  18
FIELD SAMPLING - EN ROUTE (Page 1  of  1)
Item
Are the maps adequate?
Are there problems locating lakes?
Is camera operation understood?
Are lap cards photographed at each lake?
Are the lake data forms understood and
correctly filled out?
Yes





No





Comment






-------
                                           Appendix  C
                                           Revision  2
                                           Date:   11/87
                                           Page  18 of  18
FIELD SAMPLING - ON SITE  (Page  1  of  1)
Item
Are there problems finding the deepest part of
the lake?
Is the depth recorder performing well?
Are procedures clear and easily followed?
Is required QC followed?
Are required safety procedures followed?
Are there any problems in determining
stratification?
Are Secchi disk guidelines being followed?
Are adequate volumes of sample being taken?
Are rinse procedures followed carefully?
Are samples stored correctly?
Are all forms filled out correctly?
Yes











No











Comment












-------
                                                                Appendix D
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 1 of 53
                                   APPENDIX D

             ANALYTICAL LABORATORY ON-SITE EVALUATION QUESTIONNAIRE


                             GENERAL (Page 1 of 2J


                                      Questionnaire Completion Date


Laboratory: 	



Street Address: 	



Mailing Address (if different from above): 	
City:
State: 	Zip:

Laboratory Telephone Number:   Area Code:  	No.:  	

Laboratory Director:        	     	
Quality Assurance Officer:
  (Quality Control  Chemist)"

Type of Evaluation: 	

Contract Number: 	

Contract Title:

-------
I


I                                                                       Appendix D
                                                                         Revision 2
_                                                                       Date:   11/87
•                                                                       Page 2 of 53


I                                    GENERAL (Page 2 of 2)




I
I
         Personnel  Contacted:


                            Name                                   Title
I

I

I       Laboratory Evaluation Team

•
                            Name                                    Title

-------
                                                                       Appendix D

                                                                       Revision 2

                                                                       Date:   11/87

                                                                       Page  3  of 53
       
-------
                                                                Appendix D
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 4 of 53
CM

 O)
 cnj
 >
t_
o
+J
to
L-
o
_o
(O
1

(O
o
4->
>,
(O
c
«:






















*
^
^
QJ
U
C
cu
<_
Ol
Q.
X
UJ
10
I-
^3
cu
>-
en
c
c
ra
[_
t—


c
•^
E
(O
(_
1—
O

cu
T3
ro
O
ear






cu
EE
ro
•^








C
0
4->
IS)
O
o_

















































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































































•
o>
cu
[_
CT>
O>
X3
fO
-o
L
rtf
3C
O •
+-* "^
(/) £
L- l_
ro O
CU <4-
>> t-
Ol
••-> Q.
^
•i- 
5 ^

ro
• -iJ
^0
•4-J O
i— 4->
ITS
,f— +J

U) O)
•O OJ
C t-
(O
>>
•o •—
O) •!->
C O
•^ cu
(0 1-
4-> -i-
^3 "O
O
CD
CU U
cu c
t- O)
rr> •»—
W f^
CU (-
-o cu
Q.
4-> X
(0 CU
cu
•§,£*
•r- C
x: o
•(-> +->
1/5 
•f— 'r—
3T1 5T1
T *
*

-------
                                            Appendix D
                                            Revision 2
                                            Date:   11/87
                                            Page 5 of 53
ORGANIZATION AND PERSONNEL (Page 3 of 3)
Item
Do personnel assigned to this project have the
appropriate educational background to success-
fully accomplish the objectives of the program?
Do personnel assigned to this project have the
appropriate level and type of experience to
successfully accomplish the objectives of this
program?
Is the organization adequately staffed to meet
project commitments in a timely manner?
Does the QA officer report to senior
management levels?
Was the QA officer available during the
evaluation?
Yes





No





Comment






-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                        Appendix D
                                        Revision 2
                                        Date:   11/87
                                        Page 6 of 53
LABORATORY MANAGER (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Does the laboratory manager have a copy of
the standard operating procedures?
Does the laboratory manager have a copy of
the instrument performance data?
Does the laboratory manager have a copy of
the latest monthly QC plots?
Is the laboratory manager aware of the most
recent control limits?
Does the laboratory manager review the
following before reporting data:
a. The data?
b. The QC data sheet with analyst's
notes?
c. The anion/cation balance check?
d. The calculated vs. measured
sample conductance?
Yes








No








Comment









-------
                                                 Appendix  D
                                                 Revision  2
                                                 Date:   11/87
                                                 Page 7  of 53
STANDARD OPERATING PROCEDURES (SOP)  (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Has an SOP manual been written?
Is the SOP manual followed in detail?
Does it contain all QC steps practiced?
Is a copy of the SOP manual available to
each analyst?
Are plots of instrumental accuracy and
precision available for every analysis?
Are detection limit data tabulated for
each analysis?
Yes






No






Comment







-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Appendix  D
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  8 of 53
                      LABORATORY FACILITIES (Page 1  of  4)
     When touring the facilities,  special  attention  should  be  given  to:  (a;  the
overall appearance of organization and neatness,  (b)  the  proper maintenance  of
facilities and instrumentation,  (c)  the general  adequacy  of the facilites  to
accomplish the required work.
Item
Does the laboratory appear to have adequate
workspace (12 sq. feet, 6 linear feet of
unencumbered bench space per analyst)?
Does the laboratory have a source of
distilled or demineralized water?
Is the conductance of distilled or deminer-
alized water routinely checked and recorded?
Is the analytical balance located away from
draft and areas subject to rapid temperature
changes?
Has the balance been calibrated in the past
year by a certified technician?
Is the balance checked with a class S
standard before each use and is the check
recorded in a logbook?
Are exhaust hoods provided to allow effi-
cient work with volatile materials?
Is the laboratory clean and organized?
Yes








No








Comment









-------
                                          Appendix  D
                                          Revision  2
                                          Date:   11/87
                                          Page  9  of 53
LABORATORY FACILITIES (Page 2 of 4)
Item
Are contamination-free work areas provided
for the handling of toxic materials?
Are adequate facilities provided for
separate storage of samples, extracts, and
standards, including cold storage?
Is the temperature of the cold storage units
recorded daily in logbooks?
Are chemical waste disposal policies and
procedures adequate?
Are contamination-free areas provided for
trace-level analytical work?
Can the laboratory supervisor document that
water free of trace contaminants is avail-
able for preparing standards and blanks?
Do adequate procedures exist for disposal
of waste liquids from the ICP and AA
spectrometers?
Is the laboratory secure?
Are all chemicals dated on receipt and
thrown away when shelf life is exceeded?
Are all samples stored in the refrigerator
between analyses?
Yes










No










Comment











-------
                                         Appendix D
                                         Revision 2
                                         Date:   11/87
                                         Page 10 of 53
LABORATORY FACILITIES (Page 3 of  4)
Item
Filter room or desiccator
(either is acceptable)
maintained at 15° to 35 °C and
50% relative humidity
Gas
Lighting
Compressed air
Vacuum system
Electrical services
Hot and cold water
Laboratory sink
Ventilation system
Hood space
Cabinet space
Storage space
(cite sq. ft. )
Shared space
Available
Yes













No













Comments
(where applicable, cite system,
QC check, adequacy of space)














-------
                                                                Appendix  D
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  11 of  53
                      LABORATORY FACILITIES (page 4 of  4)
COMMENTS ON LABORATORY FACILITIES

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                         Appendix  D
                                         Revision  2
                                         Date:   11/87
                                         Page 12 of  53
EQUIPMENT - GENERAL (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Balance, analytical
NBS-calibrated
thermometer
Desiccator
Balance, top
loader
Class "S"
weights
Balance table
Distilled water or
deionized water -
to meet Type I
Reagent Grade
specifications
Glassware
Drying oven
Hot plates
Equipment
# of
Units










Make










Model










Condition/age
Good










Fair










Poor










% of Time
Used in
Survey











-------
                                                               Appendix D
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 13 of 53
                            ICPES/AAS (Page 1  of  4)
Item
ICP
Flame AAS
Flame AAS
Graphite Furnace AAS
Data System
Data System
Manufacturer






Model






Installation
Date






Comments on ICP/AAS Instrumentation:

-------
                                   Appendix D
                                   Revision 2
                                   Date:   11/87
                                   Page 14 of 53
ICPES/AAS (Page  2  of  4)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol
available to analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of
the latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                   Appendix D
                                   Revision 2
                                   Date:   11/87
                                   Page 15 of 53
ICPES/AAS (Page 3 of  4)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual main-
taining the notebook personally examined,
reviewed, and signed the notebook period-
ically, dating it and recording whether
the notebook is being maintained in an
appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Is the instrument properly vented?
Is the interference correction automatically
performed?
Are dilute calibration standards
prepared fresh weekly?
Source

Yes









No









Comment










-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   Appendix D
                                   Revision 2
                                   Date:   11/87
                                   Page  16 of 53
ICPES/AAS (Page  4 of  4)
Item
Is the QC check sample prepared from an
independent stock?
Source

Is the instrument allowed to warm up at
least 15 minutes with the flame on before
the final wavelength adjustment is made?
Is the calibration curve at least a five-
point curve?
Is the first calibration curve of the day
checked for detection limit and linearity?
Is each new calibration curve checked to see
that the change in instrumental response is
less than 5%?
Are the following control samples analyzed
with each run?
Blanks
QC Sample
Duplicates
Does the analyst review the QC data sheet
output by the data clerk, and then decide
whether or not to release the data for
reporting?
Yes









No









Comment










-------
                                                               Appendix D
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 17 of 53
                            ION  CHROMATOGRAPH  (Page  1 of  5;
Item
1C
1C
1C
Autosampler
Data System
Precolumn
Separator Column
Supressor Column
Manufacturer








Model








Installation
Date








Comments:

-------
                                       Appendix D
                                       Revision 2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page  18 of 53
ION CHROMATOGRAPH (Page 2  of  5)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                       Appendix D
                                       Revision 2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page 19 of 53
ION CHROMATOGRAPH (Page  3  of  5)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Yes






No






Comment







-------
                                       Appendix D
                                       Revision 2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page 20 of 53
ION CHROMATOGRAPH (Page  4 of  5)
Item
Are dilute calibration standards
prepared fresh weekly?
Source

If manual techniques are used, is eluant
prepared fresh daily from the same
concentrated stock buffer?
Is the QC check sample prepared from an
independent stock?
Source

Is the calibration curve at least a four-
point curve for each analytical range?
Is the first calibration curve of the day
checked for detection limit and recovery?
Are the following control samples analyzed
with each run?
Blanks
QC Sample
Duplicates
Does the analyst review the QC data sheet
output by the data clerk, and then decide
whether or not to release the data for
reporting?
Is the drip tray examined daily for
reagent spills, and are spills cleaned up
daily?
Yes










No










Comment











-------
                                      Appendix D
                                      Revision 2
                                      Date:  11/87
                                      Page 21 of 53
ION CHROMATOGRAPH  (Page  5  of  5)
Item
Are pumps oiled once per week?
Is the anion precolumn cleaned as necessary?
Is the SO^'/NO-j" resolution checked once
per batch and documented?
Yes



No



Comment




-------
                                                                Appendix D
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:  11/87
                                                                Page 22 of 53
                           BNC AND ANC (Page 1 of 4;
A. Manual System
Item
pH Meter
Electrodes
Data System
Manufacturer



Model



Installation
Date



Titration Apparatus (burets, etc.):


B.  Automated System
Item
System
Meter
Electrodes
Manufacturer



Model



Installation
Date



Autotitration Specifications:
Comments:

-------
                                      Appendix  D
                                      Revision  2
                                      Date:   11/87
                                      Page 23 of  53
BNC AND ANC   (Page 2 of  4)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                     Appendix  D
                                     Revision  2
                                     Date:   11/87
                                     Page 24 of  53
BNC AND ANC (Page 3 of 4)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printout permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Are burets and micropipets calibrated
weekly or more often?
Is the stock 1.0 and 0.01 N NaOH standard-
ized as required in the methods manual?
Are the correlation coefficients of the
data examined to ensure that they are
greater than 0.9990?
Yes









No









Comment










-------
                                    Appendix D
                                    Revision 2
                                    Date:  11/87
                                    Page 25 of 53
BNC AND ANC (Page 4 of  4)
Item
Does the analyst review the QC data sheet
output by the data clerk, and then decide
whether or not to release data for
reporting?
Are electrodes stored as recommended
by the manufacturer?
Are electrodes checked and filled, if
necessary, before each analysis?
Yes



No



Comment




-------
                                                                Appendix  D
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  26 of  53
                                pH (Page 1 of 4)
Item
Meter
Electrodes
Manufacturer


Model


Installation
Date


Type of Temperature Compensation

Standard Gas Supplier 	
Standard Gas Specifications
Comments:

-------
                                Appendix  D
                                Revision  2
                                Date:   11/87
                                Page 27 of  53
pH (Page 2 of 4)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment








-






-------
                                Appendix D
                                Revision 2
                                Date:   11/87
                                Page 28 of 53
pH (Page 3 of 4)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the notebook
periodically, dating it, and recording
wheter the notebook is being maintained in
an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Is the pH meter calibrated before samples
are analyzed?
Is the pH meter calibration checked every
batch as required in the methods manual?
Is the pH electrode QC solution analyzed
first and as specified, and are the results
plotted immediately after determination?
Yes









No









Comment










-------
                               Appendix D
                               Revision 2
                               Date:   11/87
                               Page 29 of 53
pH (Page 4 of 4)
Item
Does the material used as a QC sample meet
specifications?
Source of QCCS:
Are the following control samples analyzed
with each run:
QCCS
Duplicate
Does the analyst review the QC data sheet
output by the data clerk, and then decide
whether or not to release data for
reporting?
Are electrodes stored as recommended by
the manufacturer?
Are electrodes checked and filled, if
necessary, before each analysis?
Yes






No






Comment







-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Appendix D
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 30 of  53
                 FLUORIDE ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODE (Page 1 of 3)
Item
Meter
Electrodes
Manufacturer


Model


Installation
Date


Comments:

-------
                                              Appendix  D
                                              Revision  2
                                              Date:   11/87
                                              Page 31 of  53
FLUORIDE ION-SELECTIVE  ELECTRODE  (Page  2  of  3)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                               Appendix D
                                               Revision 2
                                               Date:   11/87
                                               Page 32 of 53
FLUORIDE ION SELECTIVE ELECTRODE (Page 3 of 3)
Item
Are entries noting anomalies routinely
recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it, and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Is there an electrode dedicated to low-
level F~ analysis?
Is all labware that comes in contact with
standards and samples made of plastic?
Is the temperature regulated?
Is a multipoint calibration used?
Yes










No










Comment











-------
                                                                Appendix  D
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  33 of  b3
                         CARBON ANALYZER (Page 1 of 3)
Make and Model:

Specifications:
Comments:

-------
                                       Appendix  D
                                       Revision  2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page  34 of  53
CARBON ANALYZER (Page 2 of 3)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                       Appendix  D
                                       Revision  2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page  35 of  53
CARBON ANALYZER (Page 3 of 3)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it, and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Is C02-free water used to prepare
standards?
Are precautions taken to prevent C02
contamination of samples and standards?
Is instrument designed to determine
both DOC and DIC? If not, what
modifications are necessary?
Yes









No









Comment










-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                                                Appendix  D
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  36 of  53
                        AUTOMATED ANALYZER (Page 1 of 5j
Item
Automated Analyzer
Electrodes





Data System
Manufacturer








Model








Installation
Date








Comments:

-------
                                        Appendix  D
                                        Revision  2
                                        Date:   11/87
                                        Page  37 of  53
AUTOMATED ANALYZER (Page 2 of 5)
Item

Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available
to the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a permanent
record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes















No















Comment
















-------
1
1
•

1
1

1

1





1

1




1






1



1
1
1
1


Appendix D
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 38 of b3
AUTOMATED ANALYZER (Page 3 of 5]

Item


Are anomalies routinely recorded?


Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?

Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?

Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it, and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?

Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?

Are dilute calibration standards
prepared fresh daily?
Source

Is the QC check sample prepared fresh
daily from an independent stock?
Source

Yes































No































Comment




































-------
                                        Appendix  D
                                        Revision  2
                                        Date:   11/87
                                        Page  39 of  53
AUTOMATED ANALYZER (Page 4 of 5)
Item
Is the calibration curve at least a five-
point curve?
Is the first calibration curve of the day
checked for detection limit(s) and
linearity?
Are the analyst QC sample data calculated
and plotted real time?
Is there an automated analyzer dedicated to
each analysis (Total P, NH4+, Si02)?
Is each new calibration curve checked to
see that the change in instrumental response
is less than 5 percent?
Are the following control samples analyzed
with each run?
Reacjent Blanks
QCCS
Duplicates
Does the analyst review the QC data sheet
output by the data clerk, and then decide
whether or not to release the data for
reporting?
Is water pumped through all lines daily,
before and after analysis?
Are pump tubes changed at least once every
three days?
Is the pump cleaned when the pump tubes
are changed?
Yes







_j




No












Comment













-------
1
1

1






Appendix D
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 40 of 53
AUTOMATED ANALYZER (Page 5 of 5)

Item


Is soap solution that does not contain
1 phosphorus pumped through all lines once
a week?

Is the flowcell
1 acid-potassium
once a month?
• Is the pump oil
Date of
•

cleaned with a sulfuric
dichromate solution
ed once every three months?
last service

* Is the colorimeter mirror assembly and
color filter cl
• optimized once
Date of


1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
eaned and the alignment
every three months?
last service


Yes
















No Comment

























-------
                                                               Appendix D
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 41 of b3
                           CONDUCTANCE  (Page  1  of  3)
Item
Meter
Conductivity Cell
Manufacturer


Model


Installation
Date


Is temperature compensated  to 25  °C?

What is the cell  constant?
Comments:

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                     Appendix D
                                     Revision 2
                                     Date:   11/87
                                     Page 42 of  53
CONDUCTANCE (Page 2 of 3)
Item
Has the instrument been modified in any way?
Is a permanent service record maintained in
a logbook?
Is service maintenance by contract?
Is preventive maintenance applied?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Are manufacturer's operating manuals readily
available to the analyst?
Is there a calibration protocol available to
the analyst?
Are calibration results kept in a
permanent record?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest weekly QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Is a permanently bound notebook with
preprinted, consecutively numbered pages
being used?
Is the type of work clearly displayed on
the notebook?
Are the entries in the notebook legible?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                    Appendix D
                                    Revision 2
                                    Date:   11/87
                                    Page 43 of 53
CONDUCTANCE (Page 3 of 3)
Item
Are anomalies routinely recorded?
Has the analyst avoided obliterating
entries?
Are inserts (e.g., chromatograms, computer
printouts) permanently affixed in notebook
and signed across insert edge and page?
Has the supervisor of the individual
maintaining the notebook personally
examined, reviewed, and signed the note-
book periodically, dating it and recording
whether the notebook is being maintained
in an appropriate manner?
Does the analyst have a copy of the most
recent list of in-house samples to be
analyzed?
Date of list

Are all solutions properly labeled?
Yes






No






Comment







-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                            Appendix D
                                            Revision Z
                                            Date:   11/87
                                            Page 44 of 53
DOCUMENTATION AND TRACKING (Page 1 of 1)
Item
Is a sample custodian designated? If yes, what
is the name of the sample custodian?
Name

Are the sample custodian's procedures and
responsibilities documented? If yes, where
are they documented?
Are written standard operating procedures (SOPs)
developed for receipt of samples? If yes,
where are the SOPs documented (laboratory
manual, written instructions, etc.)?
Are written standard operating procedures (SOPs)
developed for compiling and maintaining sample
document files? If yes, where are the SOPs
documented (laboratory manual, written
instructions, etc.)?
Are samples that require preservation stored in
such a way as to maintain their integrity? If
yes, how are the samples stored?
After completion of the analysis, are the
samples properly stored for 6 months or
until laboratory personnel are told otherwise?
Are the magnetic tapes stored in a secure area?
Yes







No







Comment








-------
                                         Appendix D
                                         Revision 2
                                         Date:   11/87
                                         Page 45 of 53
ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY (Page 1  of  2)
Item
Are the required methods used?
Is there any unauthorized deviation from contract
methodology?
Are written analytical procedures provided to
the analyst?
Are reagent-grade or higher purity chemicals
used to prepare standards?
Are fresh working standards prepared daily?
Are reference materials properly labeled with
concentrations, date of preparations, and the
identity of the person preparing the sample?
Is a standard preparation and tracking logbook
maintained?
Do the analysts record bench data in a neat and
accurate manner?
Is the appropriate instrumentation used in
accordance with the required protocol (s)?
Yes









No









Comment










-------
I
I
                                                                          Appendix  D
                                                                          Revision  2
—                                                                        Date:   11/87
•                                                                        Page 46 of  53

I       	
         COMMENTS ON ANALYTICAL METHODS AND  PRACTICES
         	ANALYTICAL METHODOLOGY (Page 2 of 2)
 	       /•»nut!r~ HT f* r\M  fitiAi VT T /* A i

I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I

-------
                                      Appendix D
                                      Revision 2
                                      Date:   11/87
                                      Page 47 of 53
QUALITY CONTROL (Page 1 of 3)
Item
Does
Does
of a








the
the
QC
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
9'
h.
laboratory maintain a QC manual?
manual address the important elements
program, including the following:
Personnel?
Facilities and equipment?
Operation of instruments?
Documentation of procedures?
Procurement and inventory practices?
Preventive maintenance?
Reliability of data?
Data validation?
1 ; Feedback and corrective action?
o. Instrument calibration?


k.
1.
Recordkeejnng?
Internal audits?
Yes














No














Comment















-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                       Appendix  D
                                       Revision  2
                                       Date:   11/87
                                       Page 48 of  53
QUALITY CONTROL (Page 2 of 3)
Item
Are QC responsibilities and reporting
relationships clearly defined?
Have standard curves been adequately
documented?
Are laboratory standards traceable?
Are QC charts maintained for each routine
analysis?
Do QC records show corrective action
when analytical results fail to meet
QC criteria?
Do supervisory personnel review the data and
QC results?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
standard operating procedures?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
instrument performance data?
Does each analyst have a copy of the
latest QC plots?
Is the analyst aware of the most recent
control limits?
Does the analyst routinely review and
report blank audit data to the laboratory
manager?
Yes











No











Comment












-------
                                      Appendix D
                                      Revision 2
                                      Date:   11/87
                                      Page 49 of 53
QUALITY CONTROL (Page 3 of 3)
Item
Does the analyst update control limits
and obtain new control chart plots once
each week of analysis?
Are all QC data (control charts,
regression charts, QC data bases, etc.)
up to date and accessible?
Are minimum detection limits calculated
as specified?
Is QC data sheet information reported to
the analyst?
Yes




No




Comment





-------

                                      Appendix  D
                                      Revision  2
                                      Date:   11/87
                                      Page 50 of  53
DATA HANDLING (Page 1 of 2)
Item
Does data clerk do a 100 percent check for
accuracy of data input to the computer?
Are data calculations checked by another
person?
Are data calculations documented?
Does strip chart reduction by on-line
electronic digitizing receive at least
5 percent manual spot checking?
Are manually interpreted strip chart
data spot-checked after initial entry?
Do laboratory records include the following
information?
Sample identification number
Station identification
Sample type
Date sample received in laboratory
Time, date, and volume of collection
Date of analysis
Analyst
Result of analysis (including raw
analytical data)
Receiver of the analytical data
Yes














No














Comment















-------
                                     Appendix D
                                     Revision 2
                                     Date:  11/87
                                     Page 51 of 53
DATA HANDLING (Page 2 of  2)
Item
Does laboratory follow required sample
tracking procedures from sample receipt
until discard?
Does the data clerk routinely report
QC data sheet information to the analyst?
Does the data clerk submit QC data sheet
information to the lab manager along with
the analytical data to be reported?
Do records indicate corrective action
taken?
Are provisions made for data storage for
all raw data, calculations, QC data, and
reports?
Are all data and records retained the
required amount of time?
Are computer printouts and reports
routinely spot-checked against laboratory
records before data are released?
Yes







No







Comment






-

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
                                   Appendix D
                                   Revision 2
                                   Date:   11/87
                                   Page 52 of 53
SUMMARY (Page 1 of 2)
Item
Do responses to the evaluation indicate that
project and supervisory personnel are aware of
QA and its application to the project?
Do project and supervisory personnel place
positive emphasis on QA/QC?
Have responses with respect to QA/QC aspects of
the project been open and direct?
Has a cooperative attitude been displayed by all
project and supervisory personnel?
Does the organization place the proper emphasis
on QA?
Have any QA/QC deficiencies been discussed before
leaving?
Is the overall QA adequate to accomplish the
objectives of the project?
Have corrective actions recommended during
previous evaluations been implemented?
Are any corrective actions required? If so,
list the necessary actions below.
Yes









No









Comment










-------
                                                               Appendix D
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 53 of 53
                             SUMMARY  (Page  2 of  2)
Summary Comments and Corrective  Actions

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
I
 I
 I
 I
                                                                 Appendix E
                                                                 Revision 2
                                                                 Date:  11/87
                                                                 Page 1 of 3
  Laboratory:

Quantitation:
  Sample Set
  PART I
             APPENDIX  E

   EASTERN LAKE SURVEY -  PHASE II
PREAWARD AUDIT SAMPLE  SCORING  SHEET

                           Date:
jn:
>t 1
>t 2
Total Score
(Maximum = 200 f
QUANTITATION
Aliquot 1
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 12/6*)
Aliquot 2
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 8/1*)
Aliquot 3
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 14/5*)
Aliquot 4
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 8/2*)
Aliquot 5
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 30/5*)
Aliquot 6
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 4/1*)
Aliquot 7
(Number of parameters within
acceptance criteria x 4/1*)
QA/QC
Deliverables
>oints)
Points Awarded
Sample Set 1
(Low Cone.)










Points Awarded
Sample Set 2
(High Cone.)







Total
Score







       D.
       E.
       F.
       G.
  *Denominator  is  number  of  parameters measured.
  based  on  the  air-equilibrated  values.
                          The  scoring for pH and DIC is

-------
                                                               Appendix E
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 2 of 3
Laboratory:
Date :
PART II.  QUALITY ASSURANCE
A.  Calibration/Reagent
    Blank Analyses:

    1. All results less than
       2 x CRDL.
    2. One result greater than
       2 x CRDL.
    3. Two results greater than
       2 x CRDL.
    4. Three or more results
       greater than CRDL.

B.  Quality Control Check Sample:

    1. All verifications within
       acceptance criteria.
    2. One or more verifications
       outside acceptance criteria.

C.  Duplicate Sample Analyses:

    1. All XRSD within acceptance
       criteria.
    2. 1-2 outside acceptance
       criteria.
    3. 3-4 outside acceptance
       criteria.
    4. 5 or more outside
       acceptance criteria.

D.   An ion-Cation Balance
     Calculation:

     1. Within acceptance criteria.
     2. Outside acceptance
        criteria.
Possible
Points
6
4
2
0
10
0
6
4
2
0
4
0
Points
Awarded
Sample Set 1












Points
Awarded
Sample Set 2












Total
Score













-------
1
1
^m

1
1
1-



1




1
1






Laboratory:







Appendix E
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 3 of 3
Date:


PART II. QUALITY ASSURANCE (Continued)



E. Detection Limi
Point
Possible Award
Points Sample
ts:
1. All instrumental detection
limits within acceptance
criteria.
2. One or more
acceptance
PART III. REPORTING

4
outside
criteria. 0
AND DELIYERABLES

s Points
ed Awarded Total
Set 1 Sample Set 2 Score







Possible Points
™ A. Data results submitted in acceptable format
on standard forms.
1

1

1
2
B. Quality assurance/quality control data
supplied
C. Raw data
D. Tabulated
in acceptable format.
supplied.
1
5
instrument detection limits and associated
blank data supplied.
1
E. Validation of results with signature
1
1
1
1
1
1
of laboratory manager supplied.










1






-------
                                   APPENDIX F

                         EASTERN LAKE SURVEY - PHASE II
                              VERIFICATION  REPORT
SURVEY:
BATCH ID:
CONTRACT LABORATORY:

SAMPLING SITES:
TOTAL NO. OF SAMPLES:
NO. OF AUDIT SAMPLES: 	  TYPE:

NO. OF FIELD DUPLICATE SAMPLES: 	

NO. OF FIELD BLANK SAMPLES:
DATE CONFIRMATION REQUESTS RECEIVED:

DATE REANALYSIS REQUESTS SENT:
DATE REANALYSIS REQUESTS RECEIVED:
DATE AUDITED: 	  BY:

DATE REVIEWED: 	  BY:

DATE MAGNETIC TAPE SENT TO SAI:  	

DATE CONFIRMATION REQUESTS SENT:
I.  OUTSTANDING ISSUES - CONTRACT LABORATORY                        •

A.  The Sample Data Package (was, was not) complete as submitted.  TTI<
    items that are identified as missing should be resubmitted befor^
    process can begin:
1. a. Required forms (11, 13, I/, 18, 19, 20,
      and 22) submitted.
                                                       Yes
Par-
tial
No

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
                                                             Appendix  F
                                                             Revision  2
                                                             Date:   11/87
                                                             Page  2 of 34
b. Lab name, batch ID, and lab manager's
   signature submitted on all forms.
c. Sample ID reported on Forms 13 and 22.
d. Correct units indicated on all forms.
Form 11:
a. Correct number of samples analyzed and  the
   results for each parameter tabulated.
b. Correct data qualifiers reported as needed.
c. Initial alkalinity pH and Initial  acidity
   pH are within +0.1 pH units.
d. For all sample data, pH (Initial/Equilibrated)
   increases as DIC (Initial/Equilibrated)
   decreases and vice versa.
e. Extractable Al < Total Al for all  samples.
f. The field routine/duplicate pairs  meet
   the %RSD requirements.
g. The field blank concentrations are less than
   or equal to criteria  ^95)
   established for each parameter.
h. The audit sample data meet the criteria
   established for each parameter.
Form 13:
a. The results on Form 13 (ANC, BNC,  PHAC, and
   PHAL values) match those on Form 11 an  Form 22.
b. Correct increments of acid and base titrants
   used during ANC and BNC titrations.
c. Analyst's name recorded on Form 13.
Form 17:
a. 1C Resolution data reported for each batch of
   analyses.  Resolution must be greater than 60%.
Form 18:
a. Instrumental detection limits and  associated
   dates of determination tabulated.
b. The IDL is less than or equal to the contract
   required detection limit  (CRDL).
Form 19:
a. Date processed, date received, holding  time
   plus date processed and dates of analyses for
   the correct number of samples are  tabulated.
b. Date analyzed is less than or equal to  the
   reported holding time plus date processed.
c. pH measurements are performed on the same
   day as the DIC analysis for each sample.
Yes




















Par-
tial




















No




















                                                                       Comments

-------
                                                               Appendix F
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:   11/87
                                                               Page 3  of 34
7. Form 20:
   a.  Calibration blanks,  reagent  blanks,  correct
      number of QCCS runs, and DL  QCCS  reported
      where  required.
   b.  If high QCCS true values are reported,  the
      samples analyzed on  high range are  discussed
      in the cov°r letter  or any dilutions are
      indicated on Form 21 (Dilution Factors).
   c.  QCCS true values are approximately  in the mid-
      range  of the sample  concentrations  for  each
      parameter.
   d.  Calibration blank data are indicative of
      instrument drift (greater than 2*CRDL for
      positive values or less than -CRDL  for
      negative values).
   e.  Calibration blank data indicate trends
      throughout all batches for each analytical
      laboratory.
8. Form 22:
   a.  Duplicate precision  results  are reported  for
      each parameter.
   b.  Correct standard deviation formula  (using
      n-1) is used to calculate %RSD.
   c.  Samples selected for duplicate analysis
      contained sufficient amounts of analytes
      (10*CRDL if possible) to yield reliable
      precision.
   d.  If %RSD criterion is not met, another sample
      is selected to be analyzed in duplicate.
   e.  Sample results on Form 22 match sample
      results on Form 11.
9. Any information pertinent to sample  analyses
   is noted  on the cover letter.
                                                       Yes
Par-
tial
No
Comments

-------
I
                                                                         Appendix F
                                                                         Revision 2
                                                                         Date:  11/87
                                                                         Page 4 of 34


         IB. The Sample Data Package (was, was not) complete as submitted, but the
            following sample results should be confirmed by the contract laboratory
            (Reference Form 26):

I         Sample   Form                   Date         Date
          ID     Number   Parameter    Requested    Confirmed   Reason for Confirmation


I



I


I



I



I



 I
         C.  Sample analysis (was, was not) complete based on data submitted.  Reanalysis
 •           is recommended for the following samples (Reference Form 26):

         Sample                Reported      Date         Date
          ID      Parameter     Value      Requested    Submitted    Reason for Reanalysis

 I


 I


 I



 I



 I



 I



 I

-------
Appendix F
Revision 2
Date:    11/87
Page  5  of 34
















_
o
3E
I/O
-— •
UJ
0
»— «
U.
Li.
O

t—
z
UJ
2:
UJ
o
«c
z
<:
s

UJ
_i
D-

c£
c/>

1

t/O
UJ
=3
00
t/)
t— i

CJ3
Z
fc—i
Q
z
-
3
o


•
t-H







































>-
o:
«s
^^
2.
:s
GO

'j
z
1— 1
o
_J
o
:r
^r
i—
1—4
3:

o
cr

9>8
in
<— *

o
z
«c

z
o
»_l
1—
Q.
UJ
o
X
UJ

UJ
s:

f-

C5

^—4
Q
_J
O
"T"
.^w





















ii •
n
it
n
n
ti
ii
n
ii
it
ii
ii
n
n
ii
ii
M
n
M •
u
n
n
n
n
ii
n
n
u
n
11
ii
n
n
M
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
It
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
M
M
II
II
M
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
M
II
II
M
II
II
II
M
II
II
II
II
rtj

S_ O •!-
o ••- T:
o c +->
ro E TO
O> E C
a: o QJ
0 IX
a>
o;
c
o
o.
01
o
X
UJ
M-
0
•3
O
r- -0
O •»-> cr>2=
^ fl3 CD
CL'r- to •
Q. S- i— >-
, OJ r— T-
(0 O) O H-
CD
c a.
•o 6 o
O 1— C5
i
(0 OJ
S- •(->

                C -r-
                M  M
                CL,
                *

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
 O)
 TO
Q.
       LU
       <
       o
       UJ
       O-
       CL.
       CO

       o
       o
       ^— «
       I—
       UJ
       _ i
       UJ
       o
        «,
       oo
       z
       o
       CO
       z
       o
       o
       o
       o
                                                                             Appendix  F
                                                                             Revision  2
                                                                             Date:  11/87
                                                                             Page 6 of 34
o
UJ
II I
II >>
n i— i ICQ
n
n 3.
II O>
II •<-
II >
II Ol
II CX.
II
11 1
II >>
n >-i Ico
n
n *•»
n -i-
II -0
II U)
M
" 1
II l-H >,
M ICQ
n 
II OJ
II Qi
M I
H "H >.
ii |co
II -F-
II -0
II UJ
n
ti
II (L>
II ? 3
II O> f—
M Z (D
II >•
II
II
II O)
II -O 3
II i— r—
II O (O
II 5-
II
Variable
Name
n
II O)
II 1—
II O.O
ME'-'
II re
II 
II
II
n E
II L. O
II O >— i
II ti-
ll
II
II -C
H 0
II •»-> O
II ro •—•
II CO
II
II 	

















































































































•%
1













*





































































-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  7  of 34
IV.   ANION/CATION BALANCE CHECK

      Note:  The flagged samples and parameters  listed  in  the  following
             sections must be consistent with  the  most  current computer-
             generated exceptions.

A.  Based on Anion/Cation balance check  program,  all  samples  submitted for this
    batch (were, were not) within criteria.   Using the  anion/cation  balance
    check flowchart,  the following conclusions were made for  the samples  that
    did not meet criteria:
              Total
    Sample     Ion
      ID     Strength
                Reported %
                 Ion Bal.
                Diff.  (IBD)
                Required %
                 Ion Bal.
                Diff.  (IBD)
Parameter
   in
 Question
Explanation
     1.  Contamination (was, was not) indicated in the field and/or laboratory
         blank data for the above exceptions.   Contamination was apparent in
         the following parameters and samples:
  Sample
    ID
Contaminated
  Parameter
                  Recalculated ZIBD
Field/Lab     (Contaminated Blank Cone.
Blank Cone.          Excluded)
             Explanation

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  8  of 34


         The sample(s)  listed above should be  flagged  using the  appropriate
         sample flags "Al.  A2, or A3".

     2.   Unmeasured organic protolytes  (were,  were not)  indicated by  the  Protolyte
         Analysis Program for the exceptions listed in Section IV-A.  The
         following samples  appear to have  %IBD outside criteria  due to  un-
         measured organic protolytes:

                        Non-titrated
Sample   Reported DOC   (unmeasured)       Recalculated JIBD
  ID        (mg/L)      Organic Ions    (Organic Ions  Included)     Explanation
         The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the sample flag "A4".


     3.   Analytical  error (was, was not) indicated in measurement of one or more
         of the anions or cations (including ANC measurement) contributing to
         the Anion/Cation balance check calculation.   Analytical error was
         apparent in the following parameters and samples.

         Sample ID              Parameter In Question           Explanation

-------
                                                                Appendix F
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  9 of 34


         The sample(s)  listed above should be flagged using the appropriate sample
         flags "A5,  A6,  A7,  A8,  or A9."

V.   CONDUCTANCE BALANCE  CHECK

A.   Based on conductance balance check program,  all  samples submitted for this
    batch (were, were not) within criteria.   Using the conductance balance
    check flowchart,  the following conclusions were  made:

    -.   The % conductance difference (SCO) between the Form 11 measured
        conductance* and the calculated  conductance  (did,  did not) meet criteria.
        The following samples were listed as exceptions:

   Sample ID   Form 11  Conductance    Calculated Conductance   ZCD   Explanation
    2.   The % conductance difference between the field conductance and the
        Form 11 measured conductance (did,  did not)  meet criteria.  The following
        samples did not meet criteria:

    Sample ID     Form 11 Conductance     Field Conductance   tCD    Explanation
*The Form 11 measured conductance value is considered to represent the "TRUE"
 conductance measurement.  Therefore, all other conductance measurements are
 compared to Form 11 conductance values.

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
3.
4.
5.
                                                            Appendix F
                                                            Revision 2
                                                            Date:   11/87
                                                            Page 10 of 34
Contamination (was, was not) indicated by the field and/or laboratory
blanks for the above exceptions.   Contamination was apparent in the
following samples:
    Sample
      ID
         Contaminated
          Parameters
 Field/Lab
Blank Cone.
    Recalculated
        %CD
   (contaminated
blank cone, excluded)
Explanation
The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the appropriate
sample flag "C2 or C3".

The % Conductance Difference (%CD) indicates possible analytical error
in the contract analytical laboratory conductance measurement for the
following parameters and samples:
    Sample
      ID
          Parameter
                      Laboratory
            Contract Required
                Max %CD
                      Explanation
The above sample(s) should be flagged using the sample flag "C5".

The % Conductance Difference (ZCD) indicates analytical error in the
field conductance measurements for the following samples:
    Sample
      ID
               Field
                %CD
        Contract Required
          Max ZCD Field
                      Explanation

-------
                                                            Appendix F
                                                            Revision 2
                                                            Date:   11/87
                                                            Page 11 of  34


    The above sample(s) should be flagged using the  sample flag  "FO" (field)

6.  Based on review of the data,  unmeasured protolyte  (were, were not)
    suspected in the samples.   The followiig samples are suspected to
    contain unmeasured protolyte  ions:

    Sample ID            Reported DOC Uig/L)             Explanation
    All samples listed above should be flagged unmeasured organic ions
    using the sample flags "C4" and "C7".

7.   Analytical error (was, was not) indicated in the calculated value for
    conductance.  Analytical error was apparent in the following parameters
    and samples.

    Sample                           Contract Required
      ID     Parameter    ZCD            Max %CD               Explanation
    The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the appropriate
    sample flags "Cl, C6, C8, or C9."

-------
1
1
•

1




1






1
1
1








1
1
1
1

1
•

1
1





VI. INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL QA/QC DATA REVIEW

A. All data for the following parameters and samples were
on the following:
1. The field blank (did, did not) exceed expected val
contribute greater than 20% to the other samples i
(except for other blanks). The contaminated sampl

Sample Contaminated
ID Parameter % Contribution




All samples for the parameters listed above should
the flags "B0", "B2". or "B5".

2. The ZRSD for a routine-duplicate sample (was, was

Appendix F
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 12 of 34


not acceptable based

ues and (did, did not
n the batch
es follow:


Explanation




be flagged using


not) greater than
1.96K.* The expected XRSD exceeded the criteria for the following
parameters:
Contract
laboratory Calculated
Parameter Reported ZRSD ZRSD






Explanation


The parameters listed above should be flagged using the parameter flag
"D2".

*1.96 is the Pgs of a standard normal distribution and k is


a constant
representing the variance divided by the mean for the natural audit samples.





-------
                                                           Appendix  F
                                                           Revision  2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page  13 of  34


3.   Audit sample data (were,  were not)  within  the  expected  performance
    range.  The following audit samples were outside  of the expected
    ranges:

                     Audit         Reported       Expected
    Parameter     Sample Type       Value           Range      Explanation
    All samples in the batch for the parameters listed above should be
    flagged using the appropriate parameter flag "N0 or Ml".


4.  The calibration and/or reagent blank data (did,  did not) meet criteria.

    a. The calibration and/or reagent blank values (were,  were not) greater
       than 2 X CRDL and (did, did not) contribute greater than 10% to the
       other samples in the batch.  The affected samples are as follows:

    Sample ID     Parameter    Duplicate    % Contribution       Explanation
    All samples listed above should be flagged using the parameter flag
    "Bl" or sample flag "B3."

    b. The calibration and/or reagent blank values (were, were not) less
       than [-CRDL].  If they are, this could be an indication of negative
       bias for the following parameters.

-------
1
1


1
1
1
1







1
1

1





1
1
^B



1
1
1





Sample ID Parameter


All samples listed above
"B4".
5. Detection Limit Quality
were not) within 20% of
cal concentration of the

Appendix F
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 14 of 34
Duplicate % Contribution Explanation


should be flagged using the parameter flag
Control Check Sample (DL QCCS) analyses (were,
the theoretical concentration and the theoreti-
QCCS (was, was not) 2 to 3 times the CRDL.
The following DL QCCSs did not meet contractual criteria:


Parameter Reported


All samples listed above

6. Internal Quality Control
within contractual requi
complete. The following

Required
Value Range Explanation


should be flagged using the sample flag "Q5".

Check Sample (QCCS) analyses (were, were not)
rements and the number of runs (were, were not)
QCCSs did not meet contractual requirements:
Reported Required No. of No. of QCCS
Parameter Value Range



All samples in the batch
QCCS Runs Runs Required Explanation



for the parameters listed above should
be flagged using the appropriate parameter flags "Ql or Q2" or if
appropriate Q3 or Q4.
Issues concerning 15% QC




withholding should be noted on page 4.




-------
                                                           Appendix F
                                                           Revision 2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page 15 of 34


7.   The contract laboratory duplicate precision (was,  was not)  met.  If
    initial  precision was outside criteria,  up to two  additional  duplicates
    (were,  were not) analyzed as required by the contract.

                                Program
                               Calculated      Contract
 Parameter     Reported %RSD    •   -ERSD       Required  SRSD     Explanation
    All samples in the batch for the parameters listed above should be
    flagged using the parameter flag "D3".

    Instrumental  detection limits (did, did not) exceed the CRDL.  The
    following sample values reported at less than 10 times the IDL could
    be in question:

    Sample                  Reported    Reported
      ID      Parameter       Cone.        IDL        CRDL      Explanation
    All samples having concentrations <10 x IDL for the parameters listed
    above are in question and should be flagged using the sample flag
    "LI".

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
                                                                Appendix F
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  16 of  34
VII.  SUMMARY OF FLAGGED DATA
      All  internal  QC data (calibration blanks,  reagent  blanks,  DL QCCS and
      QCCS,  and duplicate precision) and external  QA data  (audits, field blanks,
      and  field duplicates)  were not within contractural and/or  expected criteria
      for  all  the samples and the associated parameters  listed below:

      (Parameter Flags:   B0, Bl, B4-B5, D2, D3,  N0-N2, Q1-Q5)

      (Sample  Flags:   A0-A9, B2-B3,  C0-C9,  F0-F5,  H0,  LI,  P0-P7,  X0-X4)


      PARAMETER FLAG  LISTING:

         Sample ID                   Parameter                    Flag
              SAMPLE FLAG LISTING:

                 Sample ID                   Parameter                    Flat

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  17 of  34
                         NATIONAL SURFACE WATER SURVEY
                         EASTERN LAKE SURVEY -  PHASE  II

                         FINAL PASS VERIFICATION REPORT
SURVEY:
DATE CONFIRMATION REQUEST SENT:
DATE CONFIRMATION REQUESTS RECEIVED:

DATE REANALYSIS REQUESTS SENT:
DATE REANALYSIS REQUESTS RECEIVED:
DATE AUDITED: 	 BY:

DATE REVIEWED: 	 BY:

DATE MAGNETIC TAPE SENT TO SAI:

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
 QJ
 CD
a
z
Z3
O
       UJ


       <:
       a:
       I—

       o
       a_
       a.
       CO

       O
       CO

       o
       o
       o
       o
       o
       o
       o
       I-H
       a:
                                                                      Appendix F
                                                                      Revision 2
                                                                      Date:   11/87
                                                                      Page  18 of 34
II
II
II
II -0
II O)
II 3
II 
II 
ii -I'-
ll -o
II UJ
n
n
M
n 2
II •
II
II
X,
03

CO

a>
3
(T3
O)
LJ_
(O
LT
o
1— 1
•o
II
II 
II
II
II
ll £
II i-
II O
II Li-
lt
II
II
II -G
II U
II 4->
ii (a
n m
ii
o
:z
»— 4









































































































































































-------
                                                                      Appendix  F
                                                                      Revision  2
                                                                      Date:   11/87
                                                                      Page 18 of  34
      I/)
Ol
en
as
O_
UJ
re
      a.
      a.
      co

      O
      z
      O
      CO
      z
      O
      O
      O
      z
      O
      O
       O
       O
       O
O
z
II
II
II
II -0
II 
II (U
II QC
II
II
II
II
II -0
II O)
II 4->
II -I'-
ll -0
II UJ
n
ii
n
" 3
II QJ
II Z
II
II
II
II
II ~O
II r~
M O
II
II
II
II
II f
II 0)
II Z
II
II
II
II XJ
II r—
II O
II
II
II
II O)
II 1 —
II .0 flj
II •!- fO
II S_ Z
II ra
II ra-
il
II
CO

CO

QJ
3
0}
CT>
U.
en
ro
U.
O
T3
a>
\H
II
ii a>
n i —
n a. a
n E <->
II 
ti a)
II CO
it
n 	
O
z
0




























































































































































II
U
II
II
II
II
II
II
n
H
n
n
n
H
n
n
n
n
n
ii
n
n
n
n
ii
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
M
M
ii
n
ii
n
ii
n
n
n
n
n
M
«
n
n
n
M
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
M
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
	 n

-------
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
   I
   I
   I
   I
   I
o
oo
o
»-H
U-
U-
o
UJ
-
a:
     o
     Cr
»* ii
in 11
.-H II
   ii
Q II
z n
< n
   ii
Z II
O II
I—I II
I— II
a- n
UJ II
<_> n
x n
LU II
   n
UJ II
o   •-«
                                                                                       Appendix  F
                                                                                       Revision  2
                                                                                       Date:   11/87
                                                                                       Page  19 of  34
oo n
   n
43 II
•z. ii
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
   II
CO
 CO
_J QC T3
14-
O S_
C 2
J» O ••-
^3 *^~ fl3
c -o >i
o c: +j
re £  E c
0£. O  C71Z
i_ CD 01
Q. !»,— >-
,  r— ••-
CO Q> O I—
Q 0 I
C 0.
.f— (Jj 3
•0 E 0
r— -I- L.
o t— o
3:
E t-
cD Ol
I- ^->
D-
UJ
_l
0. Q
2£ '"'^
OO
























































































































































































































































































                                                                                                      •— 
-------
                                                                Appendix F
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 20 of  34
IV.   ANION/CATION BALANCE CHECK

      Note:  The flagged samples and parameters  listed in  the  following
             sections must be consistent with the most current computer-
             generated exceptions,

A.  Based on Anion/Cation balance check program,  all  samples submitted for this
    batch (were, were not) within criteria.   Using the anion/cation balance
    check flowchart,  the following conclusions were made for the samples that
    did not meet criteria:
    Sample
      ID
    Total
     Ion
   Strength
 Reported %
  Ion Bal.
 Diff.  (IBD)
Required %
 Ion Bal.
Diff. (IBD)
Parameter
   in
 Question
Explanation
     1.  Contamination (was, was not) indicated in the field and/or laboratory
         blank data for the above exceptions.   Contamination was apparent in
         the following parameters and samples:
  Sample
    ID
Contaminated
  Parameter
                  Recalculated ZIBD
Field/Lab     (Contaminated Blank Cone.
Blank Cone.           Excluded)
                           Explanation

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  21 of  34


         The sample(s)  listed above should  be  flagged  using  the  appropriate
         sample flags "Al,  A2,  or  A3".

     2.   Unmeasured organic protolytes  (were,  were  not)  indicated  by  the  Protolyte
         Analysis Program for the  exceptions listed in Section  IV-A.   The
         following samples  appear  to have 2IBD outside criteria  due to un-
         measured organic protolytes:

                        Non-titrated
Sample   Reported DOC   (unmeasured)       Recalculated  %IBD
  ID        (mg/L)      Organic 'Ions    (Organic  Ions  Included)     Explanation
         The sample(s)  listed above should be flagged using the sample flag "A4".


     3,   Analytical  error (was, was not)  indicated in measurement of one or more
         of the anions  or cations (including ANC measurement)  contributing to
         the Anion/Cation balance check calculation.   Analytical  error was
         apparent in the following parameters and samples.

         Sample ID              Parameter In Question           Explanation

-------
                                                                     I
                                                                Appendl
                                                                Re v i s i o
                                                                Date:j
                                                                Page 2|


         The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the appropl
         flaas "A5. A6. A7.  A8. or A9."                               •



A.  Based on conductance balance check program,  all  samples submitted fi
    batch (were,  were not) within criteria.  Using the conductance  bali
    check flowchart, the following conclusions were  made:              I

    1.  The % conductance difference (%CD) between the Form 11 measured
        conductance* and the calculated conductance  (did,  did not)  meeB
        The following samples were listed as exceptions:               •

   Sample ID   Form 11 Conductance    Calculated Conductance   %CD    Lm
         flags "A5,  A6,  A7,  A8,  or A9.

V.   CONDUCTANCE BALANCE  CHECK
                                                                      I
                                                                      I
                                                                      I
    Sample ID     Form 11 Conductance     Field Conductance   %CD
    2.  The % conductance difference between the field conductance and
        11 measured conductance (did, did not) meet criteria.   The fol
        samples did not meet criteria:
                                                                       I

                                                                       I

                                                                       I

                                                                       I
*The Form 11 measured conductance value is considered to represent, the •
 conductance measurement.  Therefore, all other conductance measurements
 compared to Form 11 conductance values.
                                                                       I

                                                                       I

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
  I
  I
                                                            Appendix F
                                                            Revision 2
                                                            Date:   11/87
                                                            Page 23 of 34


3.  Contamination (was,  was not) indicated by the field and/or laboratory
    blanks for the above exceptions.   Contamination was apparent in the
    following samples:

                                              Recalculated
                                                  SCO
    Sample   Contaminated    Field/Lab       (Contaminated
      ID      Parameters    Blank Cone.    Blank Cone. Excluded)   Explanation
    The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the appropriate
    sample flag "C2 or C3".

    The % Conductance Difference UCD) indicates possible analytical  error
    in the contract analytical laboratory conductance measurement for the
    following parameters and samples:

    Sample                Laboratory    Contract Required
      ID      Parameter      %CD            Max %CD             Explanation
    The above sample(s) should be flagged using the sample flag "C5".

5.   The % Conductance Difference (%CD)  indicates analytical  error in the
    field conductance measurements for  the following samples:

    Sample         Field            Contract Required
      ID            %CD              Max %CD Field             Explanation

-------
                                                            Appendix  F
                                                            Revision  2
                                                            Date:   11/87
                                                            Page  24 of  34


    The above sample(s)  should  be flagged  using  the  sample  flag  "FO"  (field)

6.   Based on review of the data,  unmeasured  protolyte  ions  (were,  were  not)
    suspected in the samples.   The following samples are suspected to
    contain unmeasured protolyte  ions:

    Sample ID            Reported DOC (mg/L)             Explanation
    All samples listed above should be flagged unmeasured organic ions
    using the sample flags "C4" and "C7".

7.  Analytical  error (was, was not) indicated in the calculated value for
    conductance.  Analytical error was apparent in the following parameters
    and samples.

    Sample                           Contract Required
      ID     Parameter    %CD            Max %CD	         Explanation
    The sample(s) listed above should be flagged using the appropriate
    sample flags "Cl, C6, C8, or C9."

-------
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
 I
 I
 I
 I
 I
  I
  I
  I
                                                                        Appendix F
                                                                        Revision 2
                                                                        Date:  11/87
                                                                        Page 25 of 34
        VI.  INTERNAL AND EXTERNAL QA/QC DATA REVIEW
         A.   All data for the following parameters and samples were not acceptable based
              on the following:

              1.  The field blank  (did, did not) exceed expected values and (did, did not)
                  contribute greater than 20% to the other samples in the batch
                  (except for other blanks).  The contaminated samples follow:

             Sample     Contaminated
                ID         Parameter          % Contribution               Explanation
                  All samples for the parameters listed above should be flagged using
                  the flags "B0", "B2", or "B5".

              2.  The ZRSD for a routine-duplicate sample (was, was not) greater than
                  1.96K.*  The expected ZRSD exceeded the criteria for the following
                  parameters:
                                     Contract
                                    Laboratory           Calculated
                  Parameter        Reported JRSD            2RSD         Explanation
|                 The parameters listed above should be flagged using the parameter flag
                  11 n?"
        *1.96 is the Pg5 of a standard normal distribution and k is a constant
         representing the variance divided by the mean for the natural audit samples.

-------
                                                          Appendix  F
                                                          Revision  2
                                                          Date:   11/87
                                                          Page 26 of  34


3.   Audit sample data (were,  were  not)  within  the  expected performance
    range.   The following audit samples were outside  of  the  expected
    ranges:

                     Audit         Reported      Expected
    Parameter     Sample Type       Value          Range      Explanation
    All samples in the batch for the parameters listed  above  should
    be flagged using the appropriate parameter flags  "N0 or Ml".


4.  The calibration and/or reagent blank  data (did, did not)  meet criteria.

    a.  The calibration and/or reagent blank values  (were,  were not)  greater
        than 2 X CRDL and (did, did not)  contribute greater than  10Z  to the
        other samples in the batch.  The  affected samples are as  follows:

Sample ID    Parameter     Duplicate      % Contribution        Explanation
    All samples listed above should be flagged using the parameter flag
    "81" or sample flags "B3."

    b.  The calibration and/or reagent blank values (were, were not) less
        than [-CRDL].  If they are this could be an indication of negative
        bias for the following parameters.


Sample ID    Parameter     Duplicate      % Contribution        Explanation

-------
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1



Appendix F
Revision 2
Date: 11/87
Page 27 of 34
All samples listed above should be flagged using the parameter flag "B4"
5. Detection Limit Quality Control Check Sample (DL QCCS) analyses (were,
were not) within 20% of the theoretical concentration and the theoreti-
cal concentration of the QCCS (was, was not) 2 to 3 times the CRDL.
The following DL QCCSs did not me*et contractual criteria:
Parameter Reported

All samples listed above
6. Internal Quality Control
not) within contractual
were not) complete. The
requirements :
Reported Required
Parameter Value Range

Required
Value • Range Explanation

should be flagged using the sample flag "Q5".
Check Sample (QCCS) analyses (were, were
requirements and the number of runs (were,
following QCCSs did not meet contractual
No. of No. of QCCS
QCCS Runs Runs Required Explanation

All samples in the batch for the parameters listed above should
be flagged using the appropriate parameter flags "Ql or Q2" or if
appropriate Q3 or Q4.
Issues concerning 15% QC withholding should be noted on page 4.
7. The contract laboratory duplicate precision (was, was not) met. If
initial precision was outside criteria, up to two additional duplicates
(were, were not) analyzed as required by the contract.
Parameter Reported XRSD



Program
Calculated Contract
iRSD Required ZRSD Explanation




-------
                                                           Appendix  F
                                                           Revision  2
                                                           Date:   11/87
                                                           Page 28 of  34
    All  samples in the batch for the parameters  listed  above  should  be
    flagged using the parameter flag "D3".

8.   Instrumental  detection limits (did,  did not)  exceed the CRDL.  The
    following sample values reported at  less than 10 times the  I PL could
    be in question:

    Sample                  Reported    Reported
      ID      Parameter       Cone.        IDL        CRDL      Explanation
    All samples having concentrations <10 x IDL for the parameters listed
    above are in question and should be flagged using the sample flag
    "LI".

-------
                                                                Appendix F
                                                                Revision 2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 29 of 34
VII.   SUMMARY OF FLAGGED DATA
      All  internal  QC data (calibration blanks,  reagent blanks,  DL QCCS and
      QCCS,  and duplicate precision)  and external  QA data (audits, field blanks
      and  field duplicates)  were not  within contractural  and/or  expected criteria
      for  all  the samples and the associated parameters listed below:

      (Parameter Flags:   B0,  Bl, B4-B5, D2, D3,  N0-N2,  Q1-Q5)

      (Sample  Flags:   A0-A9,  B2-B3,  C0-C3,  F0-F5,  H0,  LI, P0-P7, X0-X4)


      PARAMETER FLAG  LISTING:

         Sample ID                    Parameter                    Flag
      SAMPLE FLAG LISTING:

         Sample ID                   Parameter                    Flag

-------
                                                               Appendix F
                                                               Revision 2
                                                               Date:  11/87
                                                               Page 30 of 34


                       TABLE  1.   FLAGS FOR RAW DATA BASE

FLAGS TO USE WITH ANION/CATION  PROGRAM:

  A0  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to unknown cause.

  Al  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to other anion/cation not considered in %IBD calculation.

  A2  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to anion contamination.

  A3  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to cation contamination.

  A4  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to unmeasured organic protolytes  (fits Oliver Model).

  A5  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to possible analytical  error  -  anion concentration too high  (flag suspect
      anion).

  A6  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to possible analytical  error  -  cation  concentration too low  (flag suspect
      cation).

  A7  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to possible analytical  error  -  anion concentration too low (flag suspect
      anion).

  A8  Anion/Cation %  Ion  Balance  Difference  UIBD) is outside of criteria due
      to possible analytical  error  -  cation  concentration too high  (flag
      suspect cation).

  A9  Anion/Cation %Ion Balance Difference  UIBD)  is outside of criteria due to
      possible analytical error - alkalinity measurement.

FLAGS TO USE WITH APPROPRIATE BLANK PROGRAM  (MORE  THAN  1 PROGRAM):

  B0  External  (field)  blank  is above expected  criteria for pH, DIC, DOC,  (field)
      specific conductance,  ANC and BNC determinations  (flag all samples except
      the suspect blank).

  Bl  Internal  (lab)  blank is above criteria for DIC, DOC, specific  conductance.
      (Flag all samples.)

                                                                    (continued)

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 31 of  34
                             TABLE  1.   (Continued)

 FLAGS TO USE WITH APPROPRIATE BLANK PROGRAM (MORE  THAN  1  PROGRAM)  (continued):

  B2  External (field)  blank is above expected  criteria  and  contributed  >20%  to
      sample concentrations.  (This flag is  not used  for pH,  DIG, DOC, specific
      conductance, alkalinity, and  acidity determinations.   Flag all  samples
      affected by the >202 contribution except  the  suspect blank).

  B3  Internal (lab)  blank is >2 x  CRDL and  contributes  >10% to the  sample
      concentrations.  (This flag is not used for  pH,  DIC, DOC, specific  conduc-
      tance, acidity, and alkalinity determinations.   Flag all samples affected
      by the >10% contribution except the suspect  lab  blank.)

  B4  Potential negative sample bias based on internal  (lab)  blank  data.   (Flag
      all samples.)

  B5  Potential negative sample bias based on external  (field) blank  data.   (Flag
      all samples except the suspect blank.)


FLAGS USED WITH CONDUCTIVITY CHECK  PROGRAM:

  C0  % Conductivity  Difference UCD)  is outside of criteria  due to unknown
      cause.

  Cl  % Conductivity  Difference (ZCD)  is outside of criteria  due to possible
      analytical  error  - anion concentration too high  (flag  suspect anion).

  C2  % Conductivity  Difference (ZCD)  is outside of criteria  due to anion
      contamination.

  C3  % Conductivity  Difference (2CD)  is outside of criteria  due to cation
      contamination.

  C4  % Conductivity  Difference (ZCD)  is outside of criteria  due to unmeasured
      organic anions  (fits Oliver Model).

  C5  % Conductivity  Difference (JCD)  is outside of criteria  due to possible
      analytical  error  in conductivity measurement.

  C6  % Conductivity  Difference (ZCD)  is outside of criteria  due to possible
      analytical  error  - anion concentration too low  (flag suspect  anion).


                                                                    (continued)

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page 32 of  34

                             TABLE 1.   (Continued)

FLAGS USED WITH CONDUCTIVITY CHECK PROGRAM:   (Continued)

  C7  % Conductivity Difference  UCD)  is  outside  of  criteria  due to unmeasured
      anions/cations - anions/cations  not considered in %CD calculation.

  C8  % Conductivity Difference  (ZCD)  is  outside  of  criteria  due to possible
      analytical  error - cation  concentration  too low (flag suspect cation).
                                             * V
  C9  % Conductivity Difference  (%CD)  is  outside  of  criteria  due to possible
      analytical  error - cation  concentration  too high  (flag  suspect cation).

FLAGS USED WITH DUPLICATE PRECISION PROGRAM:

  Dl  External  (field) duplicate precision exceeded  the maximum  expected  %
      Relative  Standard Deviation URSD)  and  either  the routine  or duplicate
      sample concentrations were >_10 x CRDL.   (Flag  all samples  in the  batch
      including the suspect R/D  pair.)

  D2  The external  field duplicate precision  URSD)  exceeded  the system precision
      (the Pgs  of a standard normal distribution  based  on  known  audit concentra-
      tions.)  (Flag all samples in the batch  including the suspect R/D pair.)

  D3  Internal  (lab) duplicate precision  exceeded the maximum contract  required
      % Relative Standard Deviation (XRSD) and both  the routine  and duplicate
      sample concentrations were >1Q x CRDL.   (Flag  all samples  in the  batch
      including the suspect R/D  pair.)


FLAGS USED WHEN FIELD DATA OUT OF CRITERIA (MORE  THAN 1 PROGRAM):

  F0  % Conductivity difference  UCD)  exceeded criteria when  in-situ field
      conductivity value was substituted.

  Fl  Hi 11 man/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicated  field  pH problem  when
      streamside pH value was substituted.

  F2  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicated  unexplained field pH/
      PIC problem when streamside pH value was substituted.

  F3  Hi 11 man/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicated  field  problem -
      mobile processing laboratory pH.

  F4  Hillman/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicated  field  problem -
      mobile processing laboratory PIC.

                                                                   (continued)

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  33 of  34


                             TABLE 1.   (Continued)

FLAGS USED WHEN FIELD DATA OUT OF CRITERIA (MORE THAN  1  PROGRAM):   (Continued)

  F5  Hill man/Kramer protolyte analysis program indicated  field  problem -
      unexplained (pH/DIC).

  F6  % Conductivity Difference (%CD)  exceeded criteria  when mobile processing
      laboratory conductivity value was substituted.


FLAGS GENERATED BY HOLDING TIME PROGRAM:

  H0  The maximum holding time criteria were  not met.   (Flag the sample
      identification and parameter which exceeded the  holding time).

FLAG GENERATED BY IDL PROGRAM:

  LI  Instrumental Detection Limit (IDL)  exceeded Contract Required Detection
      Limit (CRDL) and Form 11 sample  concentrations was <10 x IDL.  (Flag  the
      sample and parameter which is out of criteria.)

FLAGS GENERATED BY AUDIT CHECK PROGRAM:

  N0  Audit sample value exceeded upper control  limit.   (For the suspect
      parameter, all samples in the batch, excluding the audit that is  out  of
      criteria, should be flagged.)

  Nl  Audit sample value below control  limit.   (For the  suspect  parameter,  all
      samples in the batch,  excluding  the audit that is  out of criteria,  should
      be flagged.)

  N2  Audit sample exceeded control limits due to suspect  audit  sample  preparation
      (for the suspect parameter(s) for the audit sample only) should be  flagged.

HILLMAN/KRAMER PROTOLYTE ANALYSIS PROGRAM INDICATED THE  FOLLOWING FLAGS:

  P0  Lab problem - initial  alkalinity pH.

  PI  Lab problem - initial  acidity pH.

  P2  Lab problem - unexplained - initial pH  (alkalinity/acidity).

  P3  Lab problem - initial  DIC.

  P4  Lab problem - air equilibrated pH/DIC.

                                                                   (continued)

-------
                                                                Appendix  F
                                                                Revision  2
                                                                Date:   11/87
                                                                Page  34 of  34


                             TABLE 1.   (Continued)

HILLMAN/KRAMER PROTOLYTE ANALYSIS PROGRAM INDICATED  THE  FOLLOWING  FLAGS:
 (Continued)

  P5  Lab problem - unexplained - initial pH/DIC.

  P6  Lab problem - alkalinity (ANC)  determination.

  P7  Lab problem - acidity (BNC) determination.


FLAGS USED WITH QCCS PROGRAM(S):

  Ql  Quality Control  Check Sample (QCCS) was above  contractual  criteria.  (For
      the suspect parameter, all the samples in the  batch should be flagged.)

  Q2  Quality Control  Check Sample (QCCS) was below  contractual  criteria.  (For
      the suspect parameter, all the samples in the  batch should be flagged.)

  Q3  Insufficient number of QCCS were measured.   (For the suspect parameter,
      all the samples  in the batch should be flagged.)

  Q4  No Quality Control Check Sample (QCCS) was performed.   (For the suspect
      parameter, all the samples in the batch should be flagged.)

  Q5  Detection Limit QCCS was not 2 to 3 X CRDL and measured value was outside
      of 20% of the theoretical concentration.  (For the suspect parameter, all
      the samples in the batch should be flagged.)

MISCELLANEOUS FLAGS:

  X0  Invalid but confirmed data based on QA review.  These data should not
      be included in any statistical analysis.

  XI  Alex >A1 Tl where Alex  >_0.015 mg/L and Alex >A1 Tl by 0.010 mg/L.

  X2  Invalid but confirmed data - potential aliquot switch.

  X3  Invalid but confirmed data - potential gross aliquot or parameter
      contamination.

  X4  Invalid but confirmed data - potential sample  (all aliquots) switch.

-------